3289

Panasonic DMR-EH65 Handleiding

76
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/84
Pagina verder
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EH65
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Region number supported by
this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD players
and DVD-Video according to where they are
sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the
following countries:
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/
Netherlands/Spain/Switzerland
(As of end of February 2006)
≥This service may not be available in some
areas in the above countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.
2 ALL
3
5
2
EC
RQT8432-L
EH65.book Page 1 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
2
RQT8432
SUOMI
NORSK
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS
TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT
NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES,
SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
CAUTION!
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible or the mains plug or an appliance coupler shall
remain readily operable.
Keep the small memory cards such as the SD
Memory Card out of reach of children. If
swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
(Inside of product)
(Tuotteen sisällä)
(Produktets innside)
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VAROITUS:
TULIPALO-, SÄHKÖISKUVAARAN TAI TUOTETTA
KOHTAAVAN MUUN VAHINGON VÄHENTÄMISEKSI EI
LAITETTA SAA ALTISTAA SATEELLE, KOSTEUDELLE,
VESIPISAROILLE TAI ROISKEELLE, EIKÄ NESTETTÄ
SISÄLTÄVIÄ ESINEITÄ, KUTEN ESIMERKIKSI MALJAKOITA,
SAA ASETTAA LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE.
VAROITUS!
≥ÄLÄ ASENNA TAI LAITA TÄTÄ LAITETTA
KABINETTITYYPPISEEN KIRJAKAAPPIIN TAI MUUHUN
SULJETTUUN TILAAN, JOTTA TUULETUS ONNISTUISI.
VARMISTA, ETTÄ VERHO TAI MIKÄÄN MUU MATERIAALI
EI HUONONNA TUULETUSTA, JOTTA VÄLTETTÄISIIN
YLIKUUMENEMISESTA JOHTUVA SÄHKÖISKU- TAI
TULIPALOVAARA.
≥ÄLÄ PEITÄ LAITTEEN TUULETUSAUKKOJA
SANOMALEHDELLÄ, PÖYTÄLIINALLA, VERHOLLA TAI
MUULLA VASTAAVALLA ESINEELLÄ.
≥ÄLÄ ASETA PALAVAA KYNTTILÄÄ TAI MUUTA AVOTULEN
LÄHDETTÄ LAITTEEN PÄÄLLE.
≥HÄVITÄ PARISTOT LUONTOA VAHINGOITTAMATTOMALLA
TAVALLA.
TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI LEUDOSSA
ILMASTOSSA.
Laite tulee asettaa lähelle verkkopistorasiaa ja pistokkeen täytyy
olla sellaisessa asennossa, että siihen on helppo tarttua
ongelman sattuessa.
ADVARSEL!
DETTE PRODUKTET ANVENDER EN LASER.
BETJENING AV KONTROLLER, JUSTERINGER ELLER
ANDRE INNGREP ENN DE SOM ER BESKREVET I DENNE
BRUKSANVISNING, KAN FØRE TIL FARLIG BESTRÅLING.
DEKSLER MÅ IKKE ÅPNES, OG FORSØK ALDRI Å
REPARERE APPARATET PÅ EGENHÅND. ALT SERVICE OG
REPARASJONSARBEID MÅ UTFØRES AV KVALIFISERT
PERSONELL.
ADVARSEL:
FOR Å REDUSERE FAREN FOR BRANN, ELEKTRISK STØT
ELLER SKADER PÅ PRODUKTET, MÅ DETTE APPARATET
IKKE UTSETTES FOR REGN, FUKTIGHET, VANNDRÅPER
ELLER VANNSPRUT. DET MÅ HELLER IKKE PLASSERES
GJENSTANDER FYLT MED VANN, SLIK SOM
BLOMSTERVASER, OPPÅ APPARATET.
ADVARSEL!
≥APPARATET MÅ IKKE PLASSERES I EN BOKHYLLE, ET
INNEBYGGET KABINETT ELLER ET ANNET LUKKET STED
HVOR VENTILASJONSFORHOLDENE ER
UTILSTREKKELIGE. SØRG FOR AT GARDINER ELLER
LIGNENDE IKKE FORVERRER
VENTILASJONSFORHOLDENE, SÅ RISIKO FOR
ELEKTRISK SJOKK ELLER BRANN FORÅRSAKET AV
OVERHETING UNNGÅS.
≥APPARATETS VENTILASJONSÅPNINGER MÅ IKKE
DEKKES TIL MED AVISER, BORDDUKER , GARDINER OG
LIGNENDE.
≥PLASSER IKKE ÅPEN ILD, SLIK SOM LEVENDE LYS, OPPÅ
APPARATET.
≥BRUKTE BATTERIER MÅ KASSERES UTEN FARE FOR
MILJØET.
DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER
MODERATE KLIMAFORHOLD.
Utstyret bør plasseres i nærheten av AC-stikkontakten, og
støpslet må være lett tilgjengelig hvis det skulle oppstå
problemer.
EH65.book Page 2 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
3
RQT8432
Table of contents
HDD, disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STEP 1 Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
GUIDE Plus+ system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
GUIDE Plus+ data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Editing programme lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Set up to match your television and remote control . .22
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . . 26
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make timer recordings . . . . 28
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using S
HOWVIEW number to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . . 30
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 31
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
VPS/PDC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recording broadcasts from an external equipment . . .33
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Recording from digital/satellite receiver or decoder . . . . . . . . . . 33
Linked timer recordings with
external equipment (digital/satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . 33
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Playing DivX discs,
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . .37
Regarding DivX discs,
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Album and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from an SD card . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying all the still pictures on a card—Copy All Pictures . . . . . 57
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Linked operations with the TV
[Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control
TM
)/Q Link] . . . . . 59
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting the background style–Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment
–Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Creating Top Menu–Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
FUNCTIONS window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover
Getting started
Recording
Playing back
Editing
Copying
Convenient functions
Reference
Getting
started
RecordingPlaying backEditingCopyingConvenient
functions
Reference
EH65.book Page 3 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
4
RQT8432
HDD, disc and card information
(continued on the next page)
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
Disc type
Hard disk drive (HDD)
≥250 GB
DVD-RAM
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm
Logo –
Indicated in these
instructions by
[HDD] [RAM]
Recording format
DVD Video Recording format
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Still pictures
Video
Still pictures
Re-writable
§1
YY
Play on other players
§2
– Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.
Compatible with high
speed recording
§3
– Up to 5X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
YY [CPRM (➡ 80) compatible discs only.]
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts
§4
YY
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture
§4
YY
Creating and editing
playlists
YY
Disc type
DVD-R
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
DVD-R DL
(dual layer on single side)
≥
You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (
➡
8)
DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
Logo
Indicated in these
instructions by
[-R] before finalization [-R]DL] before finalization [-RW‹V›] before finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization [DVD-V] after finalization [DVD-V] after finalization
Recording format
DVD-Video format
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video Video Video
Re-writable
§1
ttY
Play on other players
§2
Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).
Only on DVD-R DL compatible
players after finalizing the disc
(➡ 62, 81).
Only after finalizing the disc
(➡ 62, 81).
Compatible with high
speed recording
§3
Up to 16X recording speed discs. Up to 4X recording speed discs. Up to 6X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
ttt
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts
§4
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67, Bilingual
Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture
§4
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.) t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
Creating and editing
playlists
ttt
EH65.book Page 4 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
5
RQT8432
(continued)
§1
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use one time recording disc.
§2
[RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD Recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
§3
The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.
§4
For further information (➡ 8, Important notes for recording)
§5
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are
finalized are compatible and can be played.
§6
You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs and cards. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches
and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit.You can record other
programmes as DVD-Video format.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
[Note]
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording etc. are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (➡ 26).
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times ➡ 25
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
Disc type
+R
§5
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
+R DL
(double layer on single side)
≥
You cannot directly record to a
+R DL disc on this unit (
➡
8)
+RW
Logo –––
Indicated in these
instructions by
[+R] before finalization [+R]DL] before finalization
[+RW]
[DVD-V] after finalization [DVD-V] after finalization
Recording format
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way
as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
≥After finalizing the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the disc on DVD players and other equipment.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video Video Video
Re-writable
§1
ttY
Play on other players
§2
Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).
Only on +R DL compatible players
after finalizing the disc (➡ 62, 81).
Only on +RW compatible players.
Compatible with high
speed recording
§3
Up to 16X recording speed discs. Up to 2.4X recording speed discs.
Up to 4X recording speed discs.
§6
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
ttt
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts
§4
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 67,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture
§4
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
Creating and editing playlists
ttt
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. (➡ 62)
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (➡ 61)
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the balance is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same
way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers.
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
(Inner
section of the
disc)
(Outer section
of the disc)
The available
space
Title 1
Title 2
Playback direction
Second recordable layer
First recordable layer
DVD-R DL
+R DL
HDD, disc and card information
EH65.book Page 5 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
6
RQT8432
HDD, disc and card information
.
§1
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
§2
Conforming to IEC62107.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥
DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized (
➡
81).
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”
≥Blu-ray
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SACD, MV-Disc, PD,
“Chaoji VCD” available on the market including CVD, DVCD and
SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107, etc.
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(Y: Possible to view, t: Impossible to view)
§1
If you select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70), the picture may be
clearer.
§2
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 70).
§3
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (➡ 70).
Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)
Disc type DVD-Video DVD-Audio DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)
Logo
Indicated in
these
instructions by
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [-RW‹VR›]
Instructions High quality movie and music discs High fidelity music
discs
≥Played on this unit
in 2 channels.
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
≥
You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording”
if they have been recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 61) the disc, you can record to it in DVD-
Video format and play it on this unit.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc on the equipment
used for recording.
Disc type DVD-R CD Video CD
SVCD
§2
Logo –
Indicated in
these
instructions by
DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF [CD] DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF [VCD]
Instructions
≥DVD-R
§1
with video
recorded in DivX
≥DVD-R
§1
with music
recorded in MP3
≥DVD-R
§1
with still pictures
recorded in JPEG and
TIFF
Recorded audio and music
(including CD-R/RW
§1
)
≥CD-R and CD-RW
§1
with video recorded in
DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW
§1
with music recorded in
MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW
§1
with still pictures
recorded in JPEG and
TIFF
Recorded music and video (including
CD-R/RW
§1
)
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (➡ 80) of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks that
are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels only). Refer to the
disc’s jacket for more information.
Discs that cannot be played Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
TV type
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
Yes/No
Multi-system TV
PAL Y
NTSC
Y
§1
NTSC TV
PAL t
NTSC
Y
§2
PAL TV
PAL Y
NTSC
Y
§3
(PAL60)
EH65.book Page 6 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
7
RQT8432
≥Compatible with: FAT 12 or FAT 16
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with the following capacities (from 8 MB to 2 GB).
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is formatted on other equipment, the time spent for recording may become longer. Also if the SD Memory Card is
formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 61, 81).
≥This unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT 12 system and FAT 16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
Cards you can use on this unit
Type
SD Memory Card
miniSD
TM
Card
§
MultiMediaCard
Indicated in these instructions
by
[SD]
Data that can be recorded and
played
Still pictures
Video (MPEG2)
Instructions You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§
A miniSD
TM
card adaptor included with the miniSD
TM
card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 40, 56).
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic printing on your home printer or at a
photo developing store (➡ 49, 80).
≥MPEG2 moving pictures shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or
DVD-RAM. (➡ 55)
≥MPEG2 moving pictures cannot be played directly from the SD card.
Suitable SD Memory Cards
8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB,
128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB (Maximum)
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following can be displayed on this unit.
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
§
Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g., DCIM000, etc.).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play
or edit the data.
DCIM¢¢¢
JPEG
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.JPG
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.TIF
¢¢¢XXXXX
¢¢¢XXXXX
DCIM
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.JPG
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.TIF
§
DVD-RAM
(Higher folder)
(Picture folder)
MOV
¢¢¢
.MOD
PRG
¢¢¢
.PGI
MOV
¢¢¢
.MOI
SD_VIDEO
PRG¢¢¢
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.JPG
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.TIF
DCIM
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.JPG
XXXX
¢¢¢¢
.TIF
¢¢¢XXXXX
§
MGR_INFO
Card
(Higher folder)
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT
(Picture folder)
(MPEG2 information folder)
(MPEG2 folder)
HDD, disc and card information
EH65.book Page 7 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
8
RQT8432
Important notes for recording
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
When recording a
bilingual programme
[HDD] [RAM]
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 36, Changing audio during play)
However in the following cases, select whether to
record the main or secondary audio:
–Recording sound in LPCM (
➡
67, Audio Mode for
XP Recording)
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (
➡
26)
If you record from external equipment
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the external
equipment.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
(➡ 67, Bilingual Audio Selection)
If you record from external equipment
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
When recording 16:9
aspect (Widescreen)
programmes
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
When you want to copy
titles in high speed
mode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 26).
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 86X
§
); however, the following settings are necessary
before recording to the HDD.
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
When recording digital
broadcasts
It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 80) compatible DVD-RAM.
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalized after recording or copying (➡ 62).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.
§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Recording to DVD-R DL
and +R DL
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
M1
M2
Hallo
Hello
M1
Hello
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
16:9 aspect (Widescreen)
Recorded in 4:3 aspect
Setup
Recording time in EP mode
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Rec for High Speed Copy
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Tuning
EP (8 Hours)
Settings for Recording
Maximum
On
HDD
Record to the HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
Y
k
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
(Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
[HDD]
C
H
G
S
E
A
R
C
H
E
N
T
E
R
O
F
F
M
E
N
U
R
E
T
U
R
N
T
O
P
M
E
N
U
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
V
O
L
O
N
A
.S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
M
O
D
E
P
I
C
T
U
R
E
M
O
D
E
R
E
P
E
A
T
O
P
E
N
D
C
I
N
9
V
Í /I Í
CD SEQUENTIAL
DISC
DOUBLE RE-MASTER
;∫
1
:/65/9
DISC EXCHANGE DISC SKIP
<
OPEN/CLOSE
1
2 3 4 5
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Finalize
EH65.book Page 8 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
9
RQT8432
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
saving recorded content to a disc.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer become usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem,
copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode (➡ below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ When “SLEEP” appears on the unit’s display
The HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be placed in the SLEEP mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the
disc tray.)
≥While in SLEEP mode play or recording may not start right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.
≥When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the SLEEP mode.
∫ Setup precautions
≥Do not place in an enclosed area so the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
≥Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Place in an area where condensation
does not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture
forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the
unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating
for a short time.)
This unit
VCR
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Important notes for recording/HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
EH65.book Page 9 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
10
RQT8432
Disc and card handling
∫ How to hold a disc or card
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the
lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by
such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Unit care
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
EH65.book Page 10 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
11
RQT8432
Included accessories
∫ Batteries
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
≥When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
[Note]
If you cannot operate the unit or television using the remote control
after changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (➡ 23).
∫ Use
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of March 2006. These may be subject to change.)
∏
(EUR7659Y60)
∏∏∏∏
1 Remote control 1 AC mains lead
≥For use with this unit only. Do
not use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
2 RF coaxial cables 2 Batteries
for remote control
1 Audio/video
cable
The remote control information
R6/LR6, AA
30
20
30
20
Remote control signal sensor
7 m directly in front of the unit
Disc and card handling/Unit care/Included accessories/The remote control information
EH65.book Page 11 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
12
RQT8432
Control reference guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (➡ 18)
2 Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 24, 34, 40)
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 Cancel
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system
7 Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame (➡ 36)
8 Show Top menu/Direct Navigator (➡ 34, 35, 44)
9 Show sub menu (➡ 44)
: Colour buttons for switching between Video/Picture and Video/
Playlists, selecting character type when entering text, manual
tuning settings and GUIDE Plus+ operations
(➡ 29, 34, 53, 63, 69)
; Start recording (➡ 24)
< Change recording mode (➡ 24)
= Select audio (➡ 36)
> Show status messages (➡ 43)
? Transmit the remote control signal
@ Television operations (➡ 23)
A Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ system
(➡ 24, 29)
B Show S
HOWVIEW screen (➡ 30)
C Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 33, 58)
D Delete items (➡ 50)
E
Show timer recording programme screen
(➡ 30)
F Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen (➡ 19, 28)
G Show FUNCTIONS window (➡ 64)
H Return to previous screen
I Create chapter (➡ 36)
J Skip 30 seconds forward (➡ 36)
K Direct TV recording (➡ 59)
L Linked timer recordings with external equipment (➡ 33)
M Skip the specified time (➡ 36)
N Show on-screen menu (➡ 42)
O Recording functions
[Note]
≥Buttons such as the [¥ REC] button do not protrude as much as
other buttons to stop them from being pressed accidentally.
≥If you press [EXT LINK] accidentally, the unit turns off and switches
to recording standby mode. Press [EXT LINK] again to cancel
recording standby.
≥The word “button” is not used in these operating instructions so
“Press the [ENTER] button.” is shown as “Press [ENTER].”
≥You can use this remote control to operate your television if you set
the television manufacturer code (➡ 23).
Remote control
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAU SE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
C
D
E
F
G
B
I
J
K
L
M
H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
@
A
?
N
O
EH65.book Page 12 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
13
RQT8432
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 18)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 58)
4 SD card slot (➡ below)
5 Display (➡ below)
6 Connection for camcorder etc. (➡ 58)
7 Linked timer recordings with external equipment (➡ 33)
8 Channel select (➡ 24)
9 Open/close disc tray (➡ 24, 34)
: Select drive (➡ 24, 34, 40)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
; Stop (➡ 24, 35)
< Start play (➡ 34)
= Start recording (➡ 24)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 26)
> Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (➡ 14–17)
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB (➡ 7).
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [ENTER] to switch to the SD drive
(➡ 40, 56).
If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
3 Timer recording indicator
4 Lights when the SD card is inserted in the card slot.
5 Lights when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted in the
tray.
6 Lights when the HDD, DVD or SD drive is selected
7 Main display section
8 Recording mode
Main unit
OPEN/CLOSE
DRIVE
SELECT
k
1.3
1. 3
REC
EXT LINK
CH
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
-AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
3
Opening the front panel
Press down on the
part with your finger
Inserting, Removing the SD card
Opening the cover Inserting the card
(Do not forget to close the cover. ➡ right)
Removing the card Closing the cover
The unit’s display
Press the protruding
part to open the
cover.
ADAPTER
If you are using a
miniSD
TM
card, insert it
into the miniSD
TM
card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
1
2
Press on the centre of
the card.
Pull it straight out.
Press down.
PLAY
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
REC
1
2
4
5
3
6
7
8
1 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator
Recording
Playback
Recording/Playback
2
Control reference guide
EH65.book Page 13 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
14
RQT8432
STEP 1 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥
Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–D. Confirm connections not listed below with your dealer.
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➡ 59).
≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (➡ 81).
[Required]setting] “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 68)
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.
A
Connecting a television
B
Connecting a television and VCR
AC IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
OUT
AV2
(
DECODER
/
EXT
)
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
IN
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
4
3
2
1
AV OUT
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16, 17)
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
AC IN
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
AV2
(
DECODER
/
EXT
)
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
RF
IN
IN
RF
RF
OUT
OUT
4
3
2
1
AV
VHF/UHF
RF IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV OUT
5
RF OUT
6
AV OUT
To the aerial
Aerial cable
Cooling fan
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Television’s rear panel
VCR’s
rear panel
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
RF coaxial cable
(included)
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart
terminal (➡ 16, 17)
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector
or video cassette recorder to the television,
video signal will be affected by copyright
protection systems and the picture may not
be shown correctly.
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
21-pin Scart
cable
Television
VCR
This unit
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are
both television and VCR input terminals.
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup
menu (➡ 68)
EH65.book Page 14 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
15
RQT8432
C
Connecting a television and digital/satellite receiver or decoder
D
Connecting a television and VCR, digital/satellite receiver or decoder
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup menu (➡ 68)
Connect the unit directly to the television (➡ 14, [B] )
AC IN
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
AV2
(
DECODER
/
EXT
)
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
RF
IN
IN
RF
RF
OUT
OUT
AV
5
4
3
2
1
AV OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV OUT
To the aerial
Television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel
21-pin Scart cable
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup
menu (➡ 68)
When you wish to view another programme this unit
is recording while watching a decoded broadcast
Press [0]i[ENTER]. (“DVD” appears on the unit’s
display.) Press again to cancel. (“TV” appears on the
unit’s display.)
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16, 17)
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
AC IN
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
AV2
(
DECODER
/
EXT
)
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
RF
IN
IN
RF
RF
OUT
OUT
5
3
2
1
AV
VHF/UHF
RF IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV OUT
6
RF OUT
7
AV IN
AV OUT
4
AV OUT
Digital/satellite receiver
or decoder’s rear panel
To the aerial
Aerial
cable
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
21-pin Scart cable
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other
than the 21-pin Scart terminal
(➡ 16, 17)
Television’s rear panel
VCR’s rear
panel
STEP 1 Connection
EH65.book Page 15 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
16
RQT8432
STEP 1 Connection
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the VIDEO
terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 81) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Use component output with progressive “Off” (Factory setting ➡ 67),
even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive output can
cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system televisions
using PAL mode.
For progressive output (➡ 22)
∫
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 67)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an Optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➡ 68).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection, output will be only 2 channels when
playing DVD-Audio.
∫ Connecting a stereo amplifier
Other connections
Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO or
S VIDEO terminals
OP
DIGI
(PC
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
AUDIO IN
R L
VIDEO
IN
OPT
DIGIT
(PCM
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
AUDIO IN
R L
VIDEO
IN
Red White Yellow
Red White Yellow
This unit’s rear panel
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Television’s rear panel Television’s rear panel
Red White
S Video
cable
Red White
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting a VCR with AUDIO/VIDEO or
S VIDEO terminals
O
POPTICA
DI
GDIGITAL A
(P
C(PCM/BIT
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
A
V
R L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
O
POPTICA
DI
GDIGITAL A
(P
C(PCM/BIT
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
A
V
R L
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
This unit’s rear panel
Red White Yellow
Red White Yellow
Audio/Video cable
(included)
VCR’s rear panel
This unit’s rear panel
S Video
cable
VCR’s rear panel
Red White
Red White
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
AV2
(
DECODER
/
EXT
)
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
RF
IN
IN
RF
U
T
OUT
AUDIO IN
R L
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Red White
Red White
Video cable
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Television’s rear panel
This unit’s rear panel
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
CRT
This unit
Progressive output
Connecting an amplifier or system component
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
E
O
VIDEO
OPTICAL IN
AV OUT
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
This unit’s rear panel
Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.
Amplifier’s rear panel
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
AUDIO IN
R L
AV OUT
Red White
Red White
Audio cable
This unit’s rear panel
Amplifier’s rear panel
EH65.book Page 16 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
17
RQT8432
HDMI is the next-generation interface for digital devices. When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video
signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High
Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
[Note]
≥If connecting to a TV incompatible with CPPM (Content Protection for Prerecorded Media, ➡ 80), copy-protected DVD-Audio cannot be output
through the HDMI terminal. Connect the audio cables (red, white) or the 21-pin Scart cable
§
to the corresponding terminals.
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 80) and output
as 2 channels. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
§
Only when this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
[Note]
≥If connecting to an amplifier incompatible with CPPM (Content Protection for Prerecorded Media, ➡ 80), copy-protected DVD-Audio cannot be
output through the HDMI terminal. Connect to the amplifier with an optical digital cable or audio cables (red, white).
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal
Regarding HDAVI Control function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver (amplifier) equipped with the HDAVI Control function, linked operations would be
possible. (➡ 59, Linked operations with the TV [Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control
TM
)/Q Link])
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and amplifier
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
AV2
(
DECODER
/
EXT
)
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
RF
IN
IN
RF
RF
OUT
OUT
AV OUT
HDMI AV OUT
AV
HDMI IN
AV OUT
Fully wired
21-pin Scart cable
21-pin Scart cable
This unit’s rear panel
Digital/satellite receiver or
decoder’s rear panel
HDMI cable
Television’s
rear panel
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following
functions are available.
≥Direct TV Recording (➡ 59)
≥Watching pictures from digital/satellite receiver or
decoder
(In this case, make sure to switch the
television input to “AV”.)
[Required]setting]
≥Set “Control with HDMI/Q Link” to “HDMI and Q
Link” (➡ 68).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Q Link”.)
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”
(➡ 68).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
R-AUDIO-L
AV4 IN
AV4 IN
OUT
OUT
AV2
(
DECODER
/
EXT
)
AV1
(
TV
)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
RF
IN
IN
RF
RF
OUT
OUT
AV OUT
HDMI AV OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
AV
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
HDMI cable
Fully wired
21-pin Scart cable
Television’s rear panel
Amplifier’s
rear panel
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
➡ above
[Required]setting] ➡ above
STEP 1 Connection
EH65.book Page 17 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
18
RQT8432
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the Q Link functions
(➡ 59), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television.
This unit’s Auto Clock Setting function synchronizes the time
when the TV channel that is broadcasting time and date
information is tuned.
≥If the Country setting menu appears on the television.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[ENTER].
If you select “Schweiz”, “Suisse” or “Svizzera” in the Country
setting, or when the television tuning setting has been set to
Switzerland, the “Power Save” setting menu appears. Select
“On” or “Off” (➡ 68).
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 8 minutes.
After set up is complete, TV aspect setting screen appears.
≥16:9: 16:9 widescreen television
≥4:3: 4:3 aspect television
[HDD] [RAM] Titles are recorded as they appear on screen.
[DVD-V] Video recorded for a widescreen is played as Pan
& Scan (unless prohibited by the producer of the
disc) (➡ 81).
≥Letterbox:4:3 aspect television
Widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox style (➡ 81).
3 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
and press [ENTER].
When television type and aspect is set, the GUIDE Plus+
setting screen appears.
(The above message also appears in countries where GUIDE
Plus+ system is not available. However set up is not possible.)
≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Proceed to step 2 (➡ 19, GUIDE Plus+ system settings)
≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system or if
you live in a country where GUIDE Plus+ system is not
available (➡ 19, Regarding the GUIDE Plus+ system)
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
Television picture appears. Set up is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
Í DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
GUIDE
SUB MENU
CH
W X
Numbered
buttons
Download from TV
Pos 4
Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel
RETURN
∫ If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (➡ 71).
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (➡ 69)
∫ To restart set up (➡ 70)
Country
RETURN: leave ENTER: access
Others
Deutschland
Österreich
Portugal
Suomi
Sverige
Schweiz
Suisse
Svizzera
België
Belgique
Belgien
Danmark
España
France
Italia
Nederland
Norge
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
TV Aspect
16:9
4:3
Letterbox
16:9 WIDE TV
4:3 TV
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Auto-Setup
Do you want to setup
the GUIDE Plus+ system ?
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Yes No
EH65.book Page 18 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
19
RQT8432
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons
to enter the Postal Code of your
location and press [ENTER].
It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
To download the GUIDE Plus+ data later
(➡ 20, GUIDE Plus+ data download)
3 One of the following screens will appear
Confirm the message on the screen.
GUIDE Plus+ download is completed.
GUIDE Plus+ system is not available.
Check the host channel of your country.
(➡ 21, Host Channel)
To download GUIDE Plus+ data, turn off your unit at the time
displayed on the screen or download the data manually from
“Data Download” in the Setup menu at that time.
(➡ 21, Changing the settings)
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
≥For further information about operating the GUIDE Plus+
programme list, refer to “Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system”.
(➡ 29)
[Note]
If your Postal Code changes, you can update this information later in
the Setup of the GUIDE Plus+ system (➡ 21, Changing the
settings).
Regarding the GUIDE Plus+ system
The GUIDE Plus+ system provides programme information from
the host station displayed on the television like a TV programme
magazine. Setting up to record a broadcast is easy too. Simply
select the desired programme from the displayed list. You can
also search for desired programmes by displaying only the
programmes in a certain category.
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the following countries:
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/Netherlands/
Spain/Switzerland
(As of end of February 2006)
≥This service may not be available in some areas in the above
countries.
≥There may be changes in the service areas.
[Note]
You will need to complete Channel reception settings (➡ 18) to
setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not
set correctly.
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible
via the antenna input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE
Plus+ data via externally connected satellite receivers or digital
set-top boxes is not possible.
Visit following homepage for more information.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com
RETURN
ENTER
Postal Code
Current Country: Germany
This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times
a day.
Clicking noise may hear at that time.
12.1. Wed 15:05
0 9
~
RETURN
ENTER
Setup
Do you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system?
It may take time up to 2 hours.
12.1. Wed 15:05
Yes
No
RETURN
TIMER REC
S
SUB MENU
GUIDE
Display Mode
PAG E-
PAG E+
O
O
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
ARD
PRO7
***06
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Time:
15:00
15:30 16:00 16:30
Prog. Type
All Types
Landscape
12.1 Wed
-24 Hr
15:05~16:05
7th Heaven
info
Ta...
Abenteuer...
Fliege-Die Talkshow
...
Derrick
Heute in ...
Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht
Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa...
Richter Alexander...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
Abenteuerurlaub
Aktuell
...
...
No Data
MDR
12.1. Wed 15:05
If “No Data”
appears (➡ 20,
Editing
programme
lists,
Reference)
RETURN
ENTER
Setup
No Host Channel was detected.
Please refer to Operating Instructions.
Press ENTER to continue.
12.1. Wed 15:05
RETURN
ENTER
Setup
Data download was unsuccessful.
Next download time slot will be at XX:XX.
Press ENTER to continue.
12.1. Wed 15:05
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings/GUIDE Plus+ system settings
EH65.book Page 19 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
20
RQT8432
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
Refer to the control reference on page 18.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the
television station transmitting the television programme list) several
times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
There are 2 ways to download GUIDE Plus+ data.
–Download automatically when the unit is turned off.
–Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit
is turned off.
If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update is
interrupted.
≥If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer
recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.
To ensure the GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded, you can disable
the timer recordings during data transmission. (➡ 21, left column,
Night Download)
At the data transmission time, you can download the data manually
from “Data Download” in the Setup menu (➡ 21).
[Note]
≥Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately
one day before you can display the television programme list.
≥The stations displayed in the television programme list are
determined according to geographical areas.
≥A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the
television programme list even if a signal can be received.
≥Once you have downloaded the programme list, reception of data
is required regularly to update and maintain the programme list.
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download.
≥During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating
sounds.
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [SUB MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
“Name” and press [1].
You can also press [WXCH] to browse through the station
list.
[Note]
Changes in the station list in the Setup menu (➡ 69) of your unit will
cause all Editor settings to return to the initial condition.
GUIDE Plus+ data download
Download data automatically
Download data manually
HDD
REC
PLAY
PLAY
REC
REC
SP
LP
EP
DVD
SD
PC
DCCH BS
DUB
EXT
MPEG4 D.MI X
NET
Link
DVD
AVCD
RWRAM
VR
SDPC
-
+
-
During download, “GUIDE” appears in
the display of your unit.
Editing programme lists
On/Off To select the stations to be displayed on the
programme list.
Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE
Plus+ list.
Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and
press [ENTER].
Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually
If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a
station, this station is either not supported by the
GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could
not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the
Reference field of this station). In this case, set the
appropriate Reference manually.
You can also manually assign the appropriate
Reference even if a station name was not recognized
(e.g. ***06).
Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the
appropriate station and press [ENTER].
[Note]
The station names in the Reference list can deviate
from the station list.
RETURN
ENTER
ARD
PRO7
VOX
RTL2
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Time:
15:00
15:30 16:00 16:30
Prog. Type
All Types
Landscape
12.1 Wed
16:05~17:05
Gilmore girls
Ta...
Abenteuer...
Fliege-Die Talkshow
...
Derrick
Heute in ...
Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht
Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa...
Richter Alexander...
Detektiv
Duel M...
Beyblade
Yu-...
...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
Die Abschl...
Freunde...
S.O.S Style & ...
Setup
Editor
12.1. Wed 15:05
RETURN
ENTER
Editor
12.1. Wed 15:05
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
Tuner
ARTEOn
TF6On
TF1On
ESPRTOnEuros
FR6
On
- - - -
On
On
ARD
On BBC1BBC1
ZDF
ARD
Name
On/Off
Reference
Source
***04
***05
***06
WDR
PAG E+
O
O
RETURN
TIMER REC
S
SUB MENU
GUIDE
Display Mode
PAG E-
PAG E+
O
O
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
ARD
PRO7
***06
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Time:
15:00
15:30 16:00 16:30
Prog. Type
All Types
Landscape
12.1 Wed
-24 Hr
15:05~16:05
7th Heaven
Ta...
Abenteuer...
Fliege-Die Talkshow
...
Derrick
Heute in ...
Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht
Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa...
Richter Alexander...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
Abenteuerurlaub
Aktuell
...
...
No Data
MDR
12.1. Wed 15:05
EH65.book Page 20 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
21
RQT8432
You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [SUB MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or
Host Channel.
≥Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the
receipt of wrong or no data.
≥To change the settings, release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31).
It is not possible to receive GUIDE Plus+ data in all countries
(➡ below).
Check whether the right Host Channel has been input.
List of Host Channel (As of end of February, 2006)
§1
German-speaking regions only
§2
Analogue terrestrial broadcast only
§3
Eurosport now covers the whole Dutch region. TMF will cease
transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data in May/June 2006. When TMF
ceases transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data, change the Host Channel
to Eurosport manually.
§4
RTL-TVI will be available from January 2006, and will cover the
whole of Belgium. TMF covers only Flemish speaking regions and
will cease transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data in May/June 2006.
When TMF ceases transmitting GUIDE Plus+ data, change the
Host Channel to RTL-TVI manually.
§5
RTL-TVI will be available from January 2006. The Luxembourg
line-up is available by setting up GUIDE Plus+ as country=Belgium
with the postal code 9999 (➡ 19, step 2).
≥To change the Host Channel manually ➡ left
[Note]
≥Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local
reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in
missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.
Changing the settings
Postal
Code
To enter the Postal Code
The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive
regional data.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to
enter your Postal Code and press [ENTER].
Host
Channel
To change the Host Channel manually
The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred
via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is
recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the
system automatically.
1 Press [3, 4]
to select the desired station and
press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.
≥To check the host channels of your country
➡ right column, Host Channel
Data
Download
To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The update can take approximately 2 hours.
≥For further informations ➡ 20, GUIDE Plus+ data
download
Night
Download
To select the priority during midnight
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM
every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete
data download.
If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a
timer recording overlap, you can select which will be
given priority.
On: Data Download
Timer recording does not start or is interrupted for
data download.
Off: Timer programming
GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded.
After recording finishes, we recommend you to
change this setting to “On”.
Press [
2
,
1
] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].
RETURN
ENTER
ARD
PRO7
VOX
RTL2
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Time:
15:00
15:30 16:00 16:30
Prog. Type
All Types
Landscape
12.1 Wed
16:05~17:05
Gilmore girls
Ta...
Abenteuer...
Fliege-Die Talkshow
...
Derrick
Heute in ...
Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht
Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa...
Richter Alexander...
Detektiv
Duel M...
Beyblade
Yu-...
...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
Die Abschl...
Freunde...
S.O.S Style & ...
Setup
Editor
12.1. Wed 15:05
RETURN
ENTER
Setup
Postal Code
EUROS
On
Night D
o
wnload
Data Download
Host Channel
XXXXX
12.1. Wed 15:05
Host Channel
Country Host Channel
Display of the Host
Channel
Germany Eurosport EUROS
Austria Eurosport EUROS
Switzerland
§1
Eurosport EUROS
France
Canal+
§2
CANAL
Spain Tele5 TELE5
Italy Sport Italia SI
Netherlands
§3
Eurosport/Music
Factory (TMF)
EUROS / TMF
Belgium
§4
RTL-TVI/
Music Factory
(TMF)
RTLTV/TMF
Luxembourg
§5
RTL-TVI RTLTV
GUIDE Plus+ system settings
EH65.book Page 21 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
22
RQT8432
Set up to match your television and remote control
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (➡ 81).
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”
and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
[ENTER].
Output becomes progressive.
[Note]
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off
“Progressive” if this occurs (➡ 43).
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
≥There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (➡ 68).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
To enjoy progressive video
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
Numbered
buttons
TV operation
buttons
Remain
FUNCTIONS
70:00 SP
HDD
Recording
Playback
Copy
Delete
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
Setup
Download from TV
Manual
Auto-Setup Restart
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Tuning
Connection
Others
TAB
RETURN
SELECT
Setup
AV2 Settnigs
VideoAV1 Output
HDMI Settings
PALTV System
Off
Progressive
TV Aspect 4:3
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Tuning
Connection
Others
TAB
RETURN
SELECT
ENTER
Setup
Off
On
Progressive
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Tuning
Connection
Others
RETURN
SELECT
ENTER
EH65.book Page 22 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
23
RQT8432
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
1 Point the remote control at the television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
Manufacturer and Code No.
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
[Note]
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote
Control” and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press
[ENTER].
To change the code on the remote control
7 While pressing [ENTER], press and
hold the numbered button ([1], [2] or
[3]) for more than 2 seconds.
8 Press [ENTER].
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 7).
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 7).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Television operation
e.g., 01: [0] ➡ [1] 10: [1] ➡ [0]
Brand Code Brand Code
Panasonic 01/02/03/04/
45
NOKIA 25/26/27
AIWA 35 NORDMENDE 10
AKAI 27/30 ORION 37
BLAUPUNKT 09 PHILIPS 05/06
BRANDT 10/15 PHONOLA 31/33
BUSH 05/06 PIONEER 38
CURTIS 31 PYE 05/06
DESMET 05/31/33 RADIOLA 05/06
DUAL 05/06 SABA 10
ELEMIS 31 SALORA 26
FERGUSON 10 SAMSUNG 31/32/43
GOLDSTAR/LG 31 SANSUI 05/31/33
GOODMANS 05/06/31 SANYO 21
GRUNDIG 09 SBR 06
HITACHI 22/23/31/40/
41/42
SCHNEIDER 05/06/29/
30/31
INNO HIT 34 SELECO 06/25
IRRADIO 30 SHARP 18
ITT 25 SIEMENS 09
JVC 17/39 SINUDYNE 05/06/33
LOEWE 07/46 SONY 08
METZ 28/31 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/
13/14
MITSUBISHI 06/19/20 THOMSON 10/15/44
MIVAR 24 TOSHIBA 16
NEC 36 WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
05/06
Sh ViShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
Turn TV on/off
Input select
Volume
Channel
Select
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
Setup
Tuning
Remote Control
Press “±” and “ENTER” together
for more than 2 seconds on the remote
control.
Disc
Picture
Set up to match your television and remote control
EH65.book Page 23 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
24
RQT8432
Recording television programmes
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record.
≥
[RAM]
It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a double
sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (➡ 62).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
[HDD]
≥
You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording
for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
[SD]
≥It is not possible to record onto a card.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2 If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge
set to “PROTECT” (➡ 60, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
≥
If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
To select with the numbered buttons:
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (➡ 67).
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change the channel or recording mode
while paused; however, the recording will then be as a
separate title.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording, but once the time for the timer recording to begin
is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer
recording will begin.
≥[HDD] [RAM] You can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the
recording of audio.)
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalize them (➡ 62).
If a station broadcasts Teletext information
The unit automatically records the programme’s and station’s name
if the station’s Title Page is correctly set (➡ 69).
[Note]
The unit may take some time in retrieving titles (up to 30 minutes)
and may fail in some cases.
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
1
3
;
∫
AUDIO
5
4
3,4,2,1
ENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
DRIVE
SELECT
k
1.3
1. 3
REC
EXT LINK
CH
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
-AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
5
∫
1
3
2
Numbered
buttons
Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.
Insert fully.
Insert label-up. ∫ Cartridge disc
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
Quick Start (➡ 68)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, Component Video,
Video or S Video terminals)
From the power on, recording starts in about 1 second
§
after the
REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE button is pressed while the
unit is off, the Electronic Program Guide (EPG) displays in less
than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)
§
Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM
≥“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.
≥Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may
take time to display the screen.
[Note]
Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-
RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
RECREC
RECREC
Remaining time
on the disc
REC
EH65.book Page 24 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
25
RQT8432
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
§1
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§2
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.
§3
You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
§4
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format” (➡ 61)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
∫ To finalize the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu (➡ 62)”, “Auto-Play Select (➡ 62)” or
“Disc Name (➡ 60)” in “DVD Management” before finalizing.
∫ To open the tray without disc finalization
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Recording Mode
HDD
(250 GB)
DVD-RAM DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
+RW
(4.7 GB)
DVD-R DL
§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL
§3
(8.5 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
Double-
sided
§1
(9.4 GB)
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
55 hours 1 hour 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour 45 min. 1 hour 45 min.
SP (Standard
recording mode)
111 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours 3 hours 35 min. 3 hours 35 min.
LP (Long recording
mode)
222 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours 7 hours 10 min. 7 hours 10 min.
EP (Extra long
recording mode)
§4
443 hours
(333
hours
§2
)
8 hours
(6 hours
§2
)
16 hours
(12 hours
§2
)
8 hours
(6 hours
§2
)
14 hours 20 min.
(10 hours 45 min.
§2
)
FR (Flexible
Recording Mode)
§4
443 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum for
one side
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
Approximately
9 hours with video
quality equivalent to
LP mode.
Disc Insertion/Ejection
RECREC
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management?
Format
NoYes
ENTER
SELECT
RETURN
When removing a recorded disc
Finalize the disc so that is can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalizing. This may take up to min.
Finalize
Press the REC button to start finalize.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalizing.
Recording television programmes
EH65.book Page 25 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
26
RQT8432
Recording television programmes
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 28) or while using
Flexible Recording (➡ 27).
≥If you change the channel or recording mode while recording is
paused, the time specified to stop recording is cancelled.
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc” and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Recording” and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Rec for High
Speed Copy” and press [ENTER].
7 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
[ENTER].
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
OPEN/CLOSE
DRIVE
SELECT
k
1.3
1. 3
REC
∫
1
DRIVE
SELECT
¥ REC
∫
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
1
DRIVE
SELECT
FUNCTIONS
STATUS
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
Numbered
buttons
Recording settings for High Speed
Copy
When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW after you
have recorded to the HDD
If copying a title using the high speed mode to a DVD-R, etc., set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
However, the following restrictions apply:
≥When recording bilingual broadcasts, either the main or
secondary audio can be recorded.
–If you do not connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” in “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the
Setup menu (
➡
67).
–If you connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
≥Even 16:9 aspect (Widescreen) programmes are recorded in
4:3 aspect.
Refer to the “Important notes for recording” for more information
(➡ 8).
To start recording
≥Recording television programmes (➡ 24)
≥Timer recording (➡ 28)
≥Copying from a video cassette recorder (➡ 58)
EH65.book Page 26 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
27
RQT8432
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
[HDD]
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
and press [ENTER].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
5 When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [ENTER].
≥Recording starts.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS].
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
1Press [∫].
2Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
and press [ENTER].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
3Press [∫].
To stop timer recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
3Press [∫].
4Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].
[Note]
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc
and the 30 minute balance will not
get recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
Necessary space for recording
Flexible Rec
Start Cancel
Record in FR mode.
Set rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
Maximum rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.
Playing while you are recording
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
XP
SP
LP
EP
ARD
M 1 / M 2
L R
HDD
REC 0:59
Remaining
time of
recording
e.g., HDD
Recording television programmes
EH65.book Page 27 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
28
RQT8432
Timer recording
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 24).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 71).
You can perform timer recordings by simply selecting the desired
programme from the television programme list.
1 Press [GUIDE].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme.
3 Press [ENTER].
≥Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 30, right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
4 Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
[Note]
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 70), the GUIDE
Plus+ system cannot be used.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
OPEN/CLOSE
DRIVE
SELECT
k
1.3
1. 3
REC
EXT LINK
CH
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
-AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
DRIVE
SELECT
EXT LINK
¥ REC
∫
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
DRIVE
SELECT
REC MODE
SUB MENU
∫
PROG/CHECK
RETURN
EXT LINK
ShowView
INPUT SELECT
CH
GUIDE
¢
W X
;
¥ REC
Numbered
buttons
“Blue”
“Red”
“Green”
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make
timer recordings
Before using the GUIDE Plus+ system
≥The television programme list is not displayed immediately after
purchasing this unit.
≥You must complete initial setup for the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system settings” (➡ 19) for more
information.
RETURN
TIMER REC
15.7. Tue 15:05
S
SUB MENU
GUIDE
Display Mode
PAG E-
PAG E+
O
O
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
ARD
PRO7
VOX
RTL2
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Time:
15:00
15:30 16:00 16:30
Prog. Type
All Types
Landscape
15.7. Tue
-24 Hr
16:05~17:05
Gilmore girls
info
Ta...
Abenteuer...
Fliege-Die Talkshow
...
Derrick
Heute in ...
Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht
Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa...
Richter Alexander...
Detektiv
Duel M...
Beyblade
Yu-...
...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
Die Abschl...
Freunde...
S.O.S Style & ...
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStartNameName Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
17:0016:0015. 7. TUE SP OFFHDD
1 ARD
Programme Name
Fliege-Die Talkshow
15.7. Tue 15:05
ARD
ZDF
Time:
15:00
15:30 16:00 16:30
Prog. Type
All Types
Landscape
15.7. Tue
16:05~17:05
Gilmore girls
Ta...
Abenteuer...
Fliege-Die Talkshow
...
Derrick
Heute in ...
Bianca-Wege...
F
Timer icon
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStart
No.
Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
HDD
Name
Drive
space
SP
OK
20:00
19:00
ARD
15. 7. TUE
01
OFF
New Timer Programme
F
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed
(➡ 31, Check, change or
delete a programme).
EH65.book Page 28 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
29
RQT8432
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and
Portrait view.
The Programme Type function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list
sorted by main category (e.g. Movies, Sport). Each main category
will contain individual sub categories. The GUIDE Plus+ list for the
selected main category only appears in the Portrait view.
1 Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of main categories.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
main category.
The sub menu for the selected main category appears.
Example: Press [3, 4] to select the main category Movies.
The sub category with several movie categories appears
(e.g. All Types, Action, Animation, Comedy, Drama,
Romance, Sci Fi, Thriller, Adventure).
3 Press [2] to go to the sub category
menu.
4 Press [3, 4] to make your selection.
5 Press [ENTER].
A list appears with all programmes of the selected main
category and the selected sub category.
6 Press [3, 4] to go through the GUIDE
Plus+ list.
If you want to change the station, press [3] until the station
list is highlighted and then press [2, 1].
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for the selected categories for
this station.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system
Basic operations
Landscape view
Portrait view
To change stations Landscape view
1 Press [2] until the station list is
highlighted.
2 Press [3, 4] to select a station.
3 ≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
Press the “Red” button.
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
Press [ENTER].
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Landscape
view.
Portrait view
1 Press [3] until the station list is
highlighted.
2 Press [2, 1] to select a station.
3 ≥ To view the current programme in the
preview screen:
Press the “Red” button.
≥ To see the full-screen view of the
current programme:
Press [ENTER].
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Portrait
view.
To view a
programme for
another day
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date.
To navigate within the
GUIDE Plus+ list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
Only current and future programmes are
shown.
To browse through the
GUIDE Plus+ list.
Press [WXCH].
To see programme
information
(Programmes with the
symbol)
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time, short
description) is available for these
programmes.
Press [ ] to show and hide the
information.
RETURN
TIMER REC
15.7. Tue 15:05
S
SUB MENU
GUIDE
Display Mode
PAG E-
PAG E+
O
O
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
ARD
PRO7
VOX
RTL2
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Time:
15:00
15:30 16:00 16:30
Prog. Type
All Types
Landscape
15.7. Tue
-24 Hr
16:05~17:05
Gilmore girls
info
Ta...
Abenteuer...
Fliege-Die Talkshow
...
Derrick
Heute in ...
Bianca-Wege...
Das Familiengericht
Das Jugendgericht
Richterin Barbara Sa...
Richter Alexander...
Detektiv
Duel M...
Beyblade
Yu-...
...
7th Heaven
Gilmore...
Die Abschl...
Freunde...
S.O.S Style & ...
RETURN
TIMER REC
15.7. Tue 15:05
S
SUB MENU
GUIDE
Display Mode
PAG E-
PAG E+
O
O
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
ARD
PRO7
VOX
RTL2
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Prog. Type
All Types
Portrait
15.7 Tue
-24 Hr
15:00~15:15
15:15~16:00
16:00~17:00
17:00~17:15
17:15~17:47
17:47~17:49
17:49~18:20
18:20~18:50
Tagesschau
Abenteuer Wildnis
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Tagesschau um fünf
Brisant
Tagesschau
Verbotene Liebe
Marienhof
Selecting the programme from the desired category
RETURN
TIMER REC
15.7. Tue 15:05
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
ARD
PRO7
VOX
RTL2
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Prog. Type
All Types
Portrait
15.7 Tue
-24 Hr
15:00~15:15
15:15~16:00
16:00~17:00
17:00~17:15
17:15~17:47
17:47~17:49
17:49~18:20
18:20~18:50
Tagesschau
Abenteuer Wildnis
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Tagesschau um fünf
Brisant
Tagesschau
Verbotene Liebe
Marienhof
All
Action
Animation
Comedy
Drama
Romance
Sci Fi
Thriller
Adventure
All Types
Movies
Sport
Children
Other
RETURN
TIMER REC
12.1. Wed 15:05
S
SUB MENU
PAG E-
PAG E+
O
O
Prog. Type
ARD
PRO7
VOX
RTL2
SAT1
RTL
ZDF
Prog. Type
Movies
Portrait
12. 1. Wed: 20:00~21:30
Action
The fast and the fury
21:30~23:00
Ronin
23:00~01:15
Noch 60 Sekunden
13. 1. Thu: 19:15~21:00
Der Sturm
21:00~22:30
Speed 2
14. 1. Fri: 22:30~23:00
Mission Impossible
23:00~01:30
Volcano
info
(e.g., Action)
Timer recording
EH65.book Page 29 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
30
RQT8432
Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
Entering SHOWVIEW numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.
1 Press [ShowView].
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter
the SHOWVIEW number.
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
3 Press [ENTER].
≥Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
4 Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
≥Date
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 32, Relief Recording).
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥VPS/PDC (➡ 32)
ON!)OFF (– – –)
If the broadcasting station is not transmitting VPS/PDC
signals, “jjj” appears in the menu for timer programming
under “VPS/PDC”.
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 32)
ON!)OFF
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press
[ENTER]. (➡ 63, Entering text)
4 Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 31)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 31)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 31)
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer
recordings
Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press ENTER.
ShowView
Record
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:53:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStartNameName Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
17:0016:0015. 7. TUE SP OFFHDD
1 ARD
Programme Name
Timer
Recording
Remain
No.
DateName
ARD
15. 7. TUE
01
New
T
F
Timer icon
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStart
No.
Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
HDD
Name
Drive
space
SP
OK
20:00
19:00
ARD
15. 7. TUE
01
OFF
New Timer Programme
F
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 31).
Manually programming timer
recordings
[.
l
l
l
a.
Date: Current date up to one month later minus
one day;:
Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
;:
Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStart
No.
Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
HDD
Name
Drive
space
SP
OK
20:00
19:00
ARD
15. 7. TUE
01
OFF
New Timer Programme
F
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStartName Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
22:3022:0015. 7. TUE OFFHDD
1 ARD
Programme Name
SP
Timer
Recording
Remain
No.
DateName
ARD
15. 7. TUE
01
New
T
F
Timer icon
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStart
No.
Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
HDD
Name
Drive
space
SP
OK
20:00
19:00
ARD
15. 7. TUE
01
OFF
New Timer Programme
F
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 31).
EH65.book Page 30 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
31
RQT8432
1 While the unit is on
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
Recording” and press [ENTER].
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.
≥The timer icon “F” (➡ right) disappears from the timer
recording list.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (➡ right) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
≥“F” flashes on the unit’s display for about 5 seconds when the unit
cannot go to timer recording standby.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 51).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
≥(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It
takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. If you
want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off” (➡ 21).
≥If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap
[regardless of whether they are VPS/PDC (➡ 32) controlled], the
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has
finished.
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [ENTER].
(➡ 30, right column, step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [¢].
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
To release the unit from recording
standby
Notes on timer recording
Stop Recording
Stop Recording
Cancel
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Programme
Programme
Recorded Recorded
Not recorded
Check, change or delete a programme
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
RETURN
ENTER
Press ENTER to store new programme.
Mode
StopStart
No.
Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
Name
Drive
space
New Timer Programme
Icons
F Timer recording standby is activated.
[ This programme is currently recording.
W The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
F The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The material was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
X The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 32).
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
l
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
OK: Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
! : It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.
Timer recording
EH65.book Page 31 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
32
RQT8432
Timer recording
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 34).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
≥Relief recording is not activated when recording the programme
with VPS/PDC and it is extended so that it no longer fits on the
disc.
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[ENTER].
[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
VPS (Video Programme System) or PDC (Programme Delivery Control) is a very convenient system which records exactly from beginning to end
of the TV programmes set in timer recording, even if the actual broadcasting time differs from the scheduled time due to delayed start or extension
of the programme duration. Also, if a programme is interrupted, for example, some special news is inserted, the recording will be paused
automatically and resumed when the programme continues.
[Note]
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some cases.
≥Depending on the signals sent from the TV stations, the VPS/PDC system may not work properly even when “VPS/PDC” has been set to “ON”.
≥Please check with the broadcasters in your area for details.
≥VPS/PDC does not activate while this unit is on. The system stays inactive under the condition even its setting is “ON”. In such cases, recording
starts and finishes at times you set initially.
Relief Recording
Auto Renewal Recording
Timer
Recording
1:58 SP
DVD
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Mode
StopStartName Date
VPS
PDC
HDD
DVD
22:3022:00SUN OFFHDD
1 ARD
Programme Name
SP
RENEW
ON
VPS/PDC function
When VPS/PDC recording ≥Use VPS/PDC time for recording the TV programmes.
≥Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when recording time is not VPS/PDC time.
≥VPS/PDC recording is not performed when VPS/PDC time is incorrect, even if only by one
minute. To find out VPS/PDC time, consult Teletext, a newspaper or magazine, or other source.
–If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two S
HOWVIEW numbers, use the
S
HOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC if you wish to proceed with VPS/PDC recording using
S
HOWVIEW programming.
–The default settings for “VPS/PDC” is
“OFF”
.
When the VPS/PDC signal drops out
because the broadcast signal is weak.
When a TV station does not transmit a
regular VPS/PDC signal.
Timer recording will be performed in the normal mode (without VPS/PDC) even if it was
programmed for VPS/PDC.
In this case, even if the timer recording is performed, whatever has been programmed will not be
cancelled at that particular time but at 4 a.m. two days later.
If the start times of scheduled
programmes listed in the newspaper or
magazine change at a later date.
Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when programming a programme whose start time has been
subsequently changed.
EH65.book Page 32 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
33
RQT8432
Recording broadcasts from an external equipment
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a
television with a Q Link function (➡ 59) that you can use for setting
timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 14).
1 Make timer programming on the TV.
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 24).
3 Turn off this unit.
The start and end of recording is controlled by the TV.
To stop recording
Press [
∫
].
[Note]
≥When this unit is in timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby
(“F” or “EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s display), recording from
television does not start.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 45).
Preparation
≥Connect a digital/satellite receiver or decoder to this unit’s input
terminals (➡ 15).
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
1 While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g.,If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select “AV2”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
3 Select the channel on the other
equipment.
4 Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
To record programmes from digital/satellite receiver using timer
programming
Preparation
≥Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the
Scart terminal of a VCR or a digital/satellite receiver with a 21-pin
Scart cable (➡ 15).
≥Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 68).
≥Set the “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (➡ 68.)
1 Make timer programming on the
external equipment.
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (➡ 24).
3 Press [EXT LINK].
The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to
indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer
recording standby.
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel the setting after recording is finished.
[Note]
≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
≥When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
≥When “AV2 Connection” is set to “Decoder”, EXT LINK is not
available (➡ 68).
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 45).
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), The GUIDE Plus+ data cannot downloaded.
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, video
picture is from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output”
setting (➡ 68).
≥During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only
available from the drive performing the recording.
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Making timer recordings on the
television
(e.g., of digital broadcasts)
Recording from digital/satellite receiver
or decoder
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (digital/satellite receiver) —
EXT LINK
Timer recording/Recording broadcasts from an external equipment
EH65.book Page 33 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
34
RQT8432
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥It is possible to watch playback from one drive while
recording on another (editing is not possible).
2 If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Automatic drive select function (➡ 24)
3 Press [1](PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
DivX
DivX Menu screen appears (➡ 38)
≥When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 60), play automatically starts when
inserted in the unit.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
1 Press [SUB MENU] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [ENTER].
≥The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is
turned off.
2 [HDD] [RAM]
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to “PICTURE”
Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will be cancelled.
3Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[ENTER].
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.
To show other pages
Press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1
] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER]. (Thumbnail Display only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Direct Navigator screen icons
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High
Speed Copy” was set to “On” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
∫
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR,
SUB MENU
:, 9
MANUAL SKIP
6, 5
3
RETURN
TIME SLIP
AUDIO
CREATE
CHAPTER
;
1
2;
,
;1
Numbered
buttons
OPEN/CLOSE
DRIVE
SELECT
k
1.3
1. 3
REC
∫
1
2
3
“Red”
“Top Menu”
Insert fully.
Insert label-up.
Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.
∫ Cartridge disc
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—
Direct Navigator
≥Thumbnail Display ≥Table Display
e.g., [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[ Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
t
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 32, Relief Recording)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 80, CPRM)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 70).
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
Previous Page 02/02 Next
ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10. SAT
007 008
- - -
- - -- - -- - -
HDD
PICTURE
VIDEO
RETURN
ENTER
SUB MENU
S
Select
Previous
Next
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
Page 01/01
HDD
001
ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
002
003
004
005
006
007
---
Name of titleTimeNo. Name Date Day
008
ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
RETURN
ENTER
SUB MENU
S
Select
PICTURE
VIDEO
Rec time
0:52(SP)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
007 008
- - -
HDD
PICTURE
VIDEO
EH65.book Page 34 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
35
RQT8432
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [ENTER].
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [SUB MENU].
[DVD-A] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[VCD] Press [RETURN].
[Note]
≥It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 70).
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]
Operations during play
Stop
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Pause
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
Press [6] or [5].
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
[DVD-A] (excluding motion picture parts) [CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
≥Depending on the disc, Search may not be possible.
Skip
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX : Backward direction [:] only.
Starting from a selected
title
Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
≥[HDD]
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥
MP3
and
JPEG/TIFF
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥[DVD-A] Selecting groups
While stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ right)
Input a 1-digit number
e.g., 5: [5]
≥Other discs (You can select a track with DVD-Audio.)
Input a 2-digit number
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ above) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)
Quick View
[HDD] [RAM]
Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal.
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
(Continued on the next page)
EH65.book Page 35 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
36
RQT8432
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to the control reference on page 34.
(continued)
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
^---------------}
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 42, Soundtrack).
[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 67).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26).
Operations during play
Slow-motion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD]).
Frame-by-frame
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
and press [ENTER].
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute
intervals.)
Manual Skip
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 30 seconds later.
Create Chapter
(➡ 44, Title/Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.
≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby.
Changing audio during play
-
5 min
This automatically
disappears after
approximately 5
seconds. To show the
screen again press
[TIME SLIP] again.
PLAY
L R
HDD
e.g., “L R” is selected
Soundtrack
1 ENG Î Digital 3/2.1ch
e.g., English is selected.
EH65.book Page 36 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
37
RQT8432
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
DivX
MP3
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
Still pictures (JPEG, TIFF
§2
)
§1
Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other type of files is 4000.
§2
Operation may take time to complete when playing TIFF format
still pictures, or when there are many files and/or folders, some
files may not display or be playable.
[-R] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Compatible formats: DCF
§3
compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§3
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on how
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Playable
discs
[-R] [CD]
File
format
DivX
≥Files must have the
extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”,
“.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number
of folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
(including the root folder)
Number
of files
Maximum number of files recognizable
§1
: 200 files
Support
version
DivX ver.3.11, 4.x, 5.x
Video
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.
Playable
discs
[-R] [CD]
File
format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Number
of folders
(groups)
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
300 folders (groups)
(including the root folder)
Number
of files
(tracks)
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable
§1
:
3000 files (tracks)
Bit rates 32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tags not compatible
Playable
discs and
cards
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]
File
format
File format: JPEG, TIFF (non-compressed RGB
chunky format)
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg”, “.JPG”, “.tif” or
“.TIF”.
Number
of pixels
34k34 to 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number
of folders
[-R] [CD] Maximum number of folders
recognizable:300 folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders (including higher folders)
Number
of files
[-R] [CD] Maximum number of files
recognizable
§1
:3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
[-R] [CD]
[-R] [CD]
002 group
001
001
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
003 group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
Root
Order of play
Structure of MP3 folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
(folder=group)
(file=track)
Structures of still pictures
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
≥When the highest level folders
are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.
001
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs/Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
EH65.book Page 37 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
38
RQT8432
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3
files, DivX video contents or still pictures that have been recorded on
a computer.
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/
TIFF).
≥When playing the file displayed on the screen
Press [ENTER].
≥When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the
screen
Follow the steps below.
1 Press [RETURN].
2 Press [FUNCTIONS].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Menu” and press
[ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press
[ENTER].
If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right
column.
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2
on page 39.
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 4 on page
40
[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain DivX
video contents that have been recorded on a computer.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Files are treated as titles.
≥When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”
in step 4 to change the playback mode.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[Note]
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive.
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
2Press [
3
,
4
] to select a folder and press [ENTER].
The file list for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Selecting file type to play
To select file type
6, 5
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
FUNCTIONS
3,4,2,1
ENTER
1
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
SUB MENU
STATUS
RETURN
DRIVE SELECT
∫
:, 9
Í DVD
Numbered
buttons
“Green”
Play mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of file,
select the file type
from Menu in FUNCTIONS.
e.g.,
Play Mode : DivX
FUNCTIONS
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Recording
Menu
Copy
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
Menu
Select file type.
Menu
MP3MP3
DivX
JPEG
Playing DivX discs
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Using the tree screen to find a folder
CD (DivX)
ENTER
RETURN
DivX Menu
No.
Name of Title
Tre e
Page 001/001
Total Title : 001
001 ABC.avi
Folder1 : 00025
CD (DivX)
ENTER
RETURN
DivX Menu
F 1/21
Folder
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
DATA2
12.02.2004
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
EH65.book Page 38 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
39
RQT8432
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
information about DivX VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 68, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorization Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero.
(“Rental Expired” is displayed.)
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
–you press [Í DVD].
–you press [∫].
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
–timer recording starts on the HDD.
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3
files that have been recorded on a computer.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
≥When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in
“To select file type” on page 38 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change
the playback mode.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[ENTER].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Regarding DivX VOD content
Setup
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
DivX Registration
Connection
ENTER
RETURN
Tuning
Others
DivX (R) Video On Demand
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
8 alphanumeric
characters
Playing MP3 discs
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Using the tree screen to find a group
001 Both Ends Freezing
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint It Yellow
006 Pyjamamama
007 Shrimps from Mars
008 Starperson
009 Velvet Cuppermine
010 Ziggy Starfish
1
1 : My favorite
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Total Track
Tree
G 1
T 1
TOTAL
1/111
Menu
0 9
–
Number
GroupNo.
Page 001/024
Prev.
Next
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Selected group
G: Group No.
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
Tree
G 7/25
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
Menu
Number
G 8
T 14
TOTAL
40/111
MP3 music
–
0 9
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
You cannot select groups
that contain no compatible
files.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
EH65.book Page 39 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
40
RQT8432
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Refer to the control reference on page 38.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [CD] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You can playback still pictures recorded onto a DVD-R or CD-R/
CD-RW on a PC.
≥You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, Removing the SD card (➡ 13)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD, DVD or SD drive.
The indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
[HDD] [RAM] If “VIDEO” is selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
≥[-R] [CD]
(➡ Go to step 4)
When the DivX or MP3 Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4
in “To select file type” on page 38 selecting “JPEG” in step 4 to
change the playback mode.
Direct Navigator screen icons
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To select the still pictures in another folder ➡ 41
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [ENTER].
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
≥Press [2, 1] to select the previous or next album.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 41)
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playing still pictures
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below)
is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Album View”, and then press [ENTER]
to display the Album View screen shown in step 2.
Picture and folder protected.
Picture in which the number of prints is set (DPOF)
(➡ 49, 80).
SD Card
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Album View
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
Slide Show
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
Press ENTER to show
pictures.
S
PICTURE
HDD
VIDEO
001
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
0
0
2
1. 1. 06 Total 5
1. 2. 06 Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006Date: 1. 1.2006
Album View screen
Recording date of the
first picture in the album/
number of pictures/
album name.
JPEG Menu Picture (JPEG) View
Previous
Page 001/001
Next
0001
Folder 103__DVD
0002 0003 0004
0005 0006 0007 0008
0009
---- ---- ----
ENTER
RETURN
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
screen
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
Select
Previous
Page 001/001
Next
0001
Album Name
103__DVD
0002 0003 0004
0005 0006 0007 0008
0009
---- ---- ----
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
PICTURE
HDD
VIDEO
e.g., HDD
EH65.book Page 40 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
41
RQT8432
∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
[-R] [CD]
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Useful functions during still picture play
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1](PLAY).
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].
[-R] [CD]
While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].
≥To change the display interval
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [ENTER].
≥Repeat Play
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].
Rotate
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and
press [ENTER].
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[-R] [CD] Still pictures
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation
information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen.
Zoom in
Zoom out
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [ENTER].
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and
press [ENTER].
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than
640 a 480 pixels.
Properties
While playing
Press [STATUS] twice.
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS].
Slide Show Setting
Start Slide Show
Rotate LEFT
Rotate RIGHT
ENTER
RETURN
Zoom in
Rotate LEFT
Rotate RIGHT
ENTER
RETURN
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date 1. 1. 2005 No. 3 / 9
Shooting date
Select Folder
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
Press ENTER to set.
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
JPEG Menu Picture (JPEG) View
Previous
001/001
Next
Folder 103__DVD
---- ---- ----
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
Page
0001
0002
CD(JPEG)
0003
0004
----
----
----
--------
ENTER
RETURN
F 1/3
Folder
105_DVD
104_DVD
021216_0026
103_DVD
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
EH65.book Page 41 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
42
RQT8432
Using on-screen menus/Status message
1 Press [DISPLAY].
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [ENTER].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the
menus (➡ 35) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
Audio attribute
Language
Using on-screen menus
Common procedures
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
DISPLAYSTATUS
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Soundtrack
Subtitle
1
Audio channel
Off
L R
Î Digital 2/0 ch
Other
Menu Item Setting
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Soundtrack
§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Select the audio and language (➡ below, Audio attribute,
Language).
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
Subtitle
§
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ below,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
Angle
§
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
➡ 36, Changing audio during play
STILL-P (Still picture)
[DVD-A]
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.
Page: Select the still picture number and play.
≥RANDOM: Plays in random order.
≥Return: Returns to the default still picture on the disc.
Source Select (DivX)
≥Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using interlace.
≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.
PBC (Playback control ➡ 81) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
LPCM/PPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN: Danish
POR: Portuguese
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
VIE: Vietnamese
THA: Thai
¢: Others
EH65.book Page 42 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
43
RQT8432
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
§
Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 22).
Press [STATUS].
The display changes each time you press the button.
≥TV audio type
STEREO: STEREO stereo broadcast
M1/M2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast
M1: Monaural broadcast
Play menu—Change the play sequence
Repeat Play
≥All
≥Chapter
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
≥Tr ack
[CD]
[VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[DVD-A] and MP3
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[DVD-A] [CD]
[VCD] and MP3
Select “Off” to cancel.
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive
§
(➡ 81)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Transfer
§
[When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 81, Film and video).
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration to the right, then select
“Auto”.
When the output signal is NTSC
≥Auto1
(normal):
≥Auto2:
≥Video:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
≥Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
a video tape.
≥On: Noise reduction works for input video.
≥Off: Noise reduction is off. You can record the input
signal as it is.
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
V.S.S.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround
function on the connected equipment.)
≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.
Dialog Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Other menu—Change the display position
Position
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu
moves.
Status messages
13:50 XP
18:53:50 11.10.
π T1 0:05.14 XP π T2 0:00.10 XP
Remain
π
REC
PLAY
STEREO
L R
DVD REC
HDD
Selected drive/type of disc
TV audio type being received (➡ below)
Recording or play status/input channel
Selected audio type
Available recording time and
recording mode
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Date and time
No display
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
Title number and elapsed time during
recording/Recording mode
The remaining time appears here while
stopped.
Using on-screen menus/Status message
EH65.book Page 43 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
44
RQT8432
Editing titles/chapters
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(You cannot edit finalized discs.)
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
–Titles: 500
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[Note]
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 60).
1 During play or while stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 [HDD] [RAM]
Press the “Red” button to select
“VIDEO”.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
4
Press [SUB MENU].
5
Press [
3
,
4
] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER]. (➡ 45)
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6
Press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1
] to select the chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
7
Press [SUB MENU], then [
3
,
4
] to
select the operation and press [ENTER].
≥You can go back to Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Title/Chapter
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 36, 45, Create Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (➡ 46).
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
STATUS
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
3,4,2,1
ENTER
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
RETURN
:, 9
;
1
DRIVE SELECT
SUB MENU
“Red”
Title
Chapter
Start End
Chapter
Title
Chapter Chapter Chapter
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10. SAT
007 008
- - -
- - -- - -
HDD
- - -
PICTURE
VIDEO
Select
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
S
Previous
Next
Title View screen
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
Divide Title
Change Thumbnail
Enter Name
Properties
Edit
Table Display
Album View
Chapter View
Delete
Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 45).
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance ➡ 34
Playing still pictures ➡ 40, step 3
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Chapter View
008 ARD 11.10. SAT
001
--- ---
--- ------ ---
--- ------ ---
---
HDD
PICTURE
VIDEO
0:31.24
Chapter View screen
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Title View
Delete Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 45).
EH65.book Page 44 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
45
RQT8432
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ 44)
§
Multiple editing is possible.
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ 44)
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Title operations
Delete
§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
Enter Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give names to recorded titles.
➡ 63, Entering text
Set up Protection
§
Cancel Protection
§
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1 Press [ENTER] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
≥Select “Next” and press [ENTER] to delete other sections.
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(➡ below, For your reference)
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Press [ENTER] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [ENTER]
at the point you want to change.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
You can divide a title into two.
1 Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide the title.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [ENTER].
To confirm the division point
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [ENTER]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [ENTER] at the point where you want to divide
the title.
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 80) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
Properties
No.
Name
Date
026
ARD
11.10.2006
Time
Rec time
12:19
0:30 (SP)MON
Dinosaur
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title
V
ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10.
007 008
HDD
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
Start
Next
Exit
0:43.21
PLAY
008
End
- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -
Start End
HDD
ENTER
RETURN
PICTURE
VIDEO
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Change Thumbnail
Change
Exit
0:00.00
- -:- -.- -
Change
HDD
;
008
ENTER
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
PICTURE
VIDEO
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
Preview
Exit
0:43.21
PLAY
008
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Divide
HDD
PICTURE
VIDEO
Chapter operations
Delete Chapter
§
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
Create Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
1 Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
Combine Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
Create
Exit
0:43.21
PLAY
008
HDD
PICTURE
VIDEO
For your reference
≥Use search (➡ 35), Time Slip (➡ 36) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 36) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 36).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
Editing titles/chapters
EH65.book Page 45 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
46
RQT8432
Creating, editing and playing playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
–Playlists: 99
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release disc or cartridge protection (➡ 60).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 70).
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title
and press [4].
≥Press [ENTER] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step 7.
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
[ENTER].
Press [3] to cancel.
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (➡ 45, Create Chapter)
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8 Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
You can arrange the chapters (➡ 44) to create a playlist.
Copying (➡ 51) a playlist will create a title.
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
Creating playlists
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
STATUS
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
MANUAL SKIPMANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTERCHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
DRIVE SELECT
SUB MENU
FUNCTIONS
Title
Chapter
Playlist
Chapter
Title
Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter
Chapter
Remain
FUNCTIONS
30:00 SP
HDD
Recording
Playback
Copy
Delete
To Others
ShowView Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
HDD Management
ENTER
RETURN
Playlists Playlist View
- -
- -
Create
HDD
- -
- -- -
- -
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
001
001
Source Title
Source Chapter
Chapters in Playlist
Page 001/001
002 003
---
---------
002
Playlists
Press RETURN to exit.
HDD
------
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
---
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
001
001
Source Title
Source Chapter
Chapters in Playlist
Page 001/001
002 003
---
------------
002
Playlists
Press RETURN to exit.
HDD
------
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
001
002 003
---
------------
Source Title
Source Chapter
Chapters in Playlist
Press RETURN to exit.
001 002
HDD
------
Page 001/001
Playlists
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
ENTER
RETURN
EH65.book Page 46 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
47
RQT8432
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist.
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
5 Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press
[ENTER].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER].
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
7 Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press
[ENTER].
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
§
Multiple editing is possible.
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
01
Create
- -- -
- -- -- -
12.10. SUN 0:30
HDD
Playlists Playlist View
Playlist View screen
Copy
Enter Name
Change Thumbnail
Create
Properties
Edit
Chapter View
Delete
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
Playlists Chapter View
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
001
--- ---
--- ------ ---
--- ------ ---
002
HDD
0:19.36
0:10.24
Chapter View screen
Move Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
Add Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Playlist operations
Delete
§
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
Create
[HDD] [RAM]
➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–8
Copy
§
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[ENTER].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
Enter
Name
[HDD] [RAM]
You can give names to playlists.
➡ 63, Entering text
Change
Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM]
➡ 45, Change Thumbnail
Chapter operations
Add
Chapter
➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–7
Move
Chapter
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
Create
Chapter
➡ 45, Create Chapter
Combine
Chapters
➡ 45, Combine Chapters
Delete
Chapter
§
➡ 45, Delete Chapter
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
Properties
Dinosaur
No.
Chapters 0:30.53
Date
Total
10
002
12.10.2006 TUE
ENTER
RETURN
Playlists Move Chapter
Previous Page 01/01 Next
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
001
--- ---
--- ------ ---
--- ------ ---
002
HDD
ENTER
RETURN
0:10.240:10.24
0:19.36
Creating, editing and playing playlists
EH65.book Page 47 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
48
RQT8432
Editing still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R and CD-R/CD-
RW.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 [HDD] [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select
“PICTURE”.
3 Editing an album:
Select the album to be edited and press
[SUB MENU].
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [SUB MENU] without selecting album.
Editing a still picture:
1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [ENTER].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[SUB MENU].
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
∫To edit the album
(e.g., [SD])
∫To edit still picture
(e.g., [SD])
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
:, 9
DRIVE SELECT
;
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
SUB MENU
“Green”
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Slide Show Setting
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
Start Slide Show
Select Folder
Delete Album
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Enter Album Name
[RAM] [SD]
This is only displayed when there are other higher
folders that can be viewed.
To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)
Album and picture operation (➡ 49)
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 41)
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
DPOF
Album View
Delete Picture
Album and picture operation
(➡ 49)
You can go back to Album View.
EH65.book Page 48 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
49
RQT8432
After performing steps 1–4, page 48
§
Multiple editing is possible.
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.
Album and picture operation
Delete Picture
§
Delete Album
§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
Enter Album Name
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
You can give names to albums.
➡ 63, Entering text
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
Set up Protection
§
Cancel Protection
§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album
may be deleted by another unit.
DPOF
§
[SD]
You can select individual pictures for printing and specify the number of prints to be made.
Press [2, 1] to select number of print (0 to 9) and
press [ENTER].
The DPOF mark appears.
To cancel the print setting
Set the number of print to “0”.
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewable on other equipment.
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units will be released.
≥Settings cannot be made for files not in accordance with DCF standards or if there is no remaining space
on the card.
Add Pictures
Create Album
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture you want
to add and press [ENTER].
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].
3Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Pictures” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Album” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
Only for “Create Album”
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 63, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording
date information, the date will appear as [--.--.----].)
Copy to DVD-RAM
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
Press [2] to select “Start” and press [ENTER].
You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Pi
c
SD CARD
0001
Album Name
103__
0002
0005 0006
DPOF
Set up DPOF on the picture (JPEG).
Setting on other equipment will be cancelled.
1
P ENTER t t
Number of prints
Create Album
Previous Page 02/02
Next
12. 6.06 Total 312. 5.06 Total 24
101_DVD100_DVD
007
008
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
HDD
RETURN
ENTER
Previous
Next
Step
1
2
3
4
Please select album to copy.
e.g.,
Copy Album
Copy Pictures
Copy all the pictures in the selected album?
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Create Album
e.g.,
Editing still pictures
EH65.book Page 49 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
50
RQT8432
Delete Navigator
[HDD]
[RAM]
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[+RW]
[SD]
(You cannot delete items on finalized discs.)
≥A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 60, Setting the protection).
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
[HDD]
[RAM]
To switch to the other view
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
3 If you want to delete a title:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [ENTER].
If you want to delete an album:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [DELETE].
If you want to delete a still picture:
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to
delete and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
You can confirm the titles or pictures etc. that you have
selected using the sub menu.
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 44, step
5).
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 48,
step 4).
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG) View”
(➡ 48, step 4).
4 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
The title, album or the picture is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
1 While playing
Press [DELETE].
You cannot delete a picture during a Slide Show.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
The title or the picture is deleted.
∫ Available disc space after deleting
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture),
the space deleted becomes available for recording.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
DELETE
DRIVE
SELECT
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
;
:, 9
“Green”
“Red”
......
Title Title
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles or still
pictures
......
Title
Title
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Available disc space
increases after deleting
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Deleting titles or pictures during play
DELETE Navigator
Title View
Previous Page 02/02 Next
ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10. SAT
007 008
- - -
- - -- - -- - -
HDD
PICTURE
VIDEO
RETURN
ENTER
SUB MENU
S
Select
Previous
Next
EH65.book Page 50 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
51
RQT8432
Copying titles or playlists
§
1
To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (
➡
26).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes
≥Playlists created from multiple titles using FR recording mode
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments
≥MPEG2 moving picture titles copied to the HDD from an SD card
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed )
§2
If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
§3
You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (
➡
62).
§4
You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5
[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalizing after copying the disc.
§6
Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7
When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8
Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalization or when copying MPEG2 moving pictures from an SD card.)
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 8).
–Still pictures cannot be played.
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1
In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§2
In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Copy Advanced Copy
Features
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult
settings.
Make a copy list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
way you want.
Copy direction
HDD ➝ DVD YY
DVD ➝ HDD t
Y
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalized disc)
High speed mode copy
§1
Y
Y
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with
finalized discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
Changing recording mode t
Y
§2
Finalize
§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalized
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
High speed mode Normal speed mode High speed mode Normal speed mode
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures
from an SD card (➡ 55)
tt
Y
[HDD] [RAM] only
t
Copying playlists
§4
ttY Y
Are chapters maintained? Y
t
§5
Y
t
§5
Are thumbnails maintained? Y
t
§6
Y
§7
t
§6
Recording and Playing while Copying
tt
Y
§8
t
HDD
1
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
16X Speed
DVD-R
4X Speed
DVD-R DL
4X Speed
§1
DVD-RW
8X Speed
§2
+R
2.4X Speed
+R DL
4X Speed
+RW
Rec
mode
Rec
time
Required
time
Speed
Required
time
Speed
Required
time
Speed
Required
time
Speed
Required
time
Speed
Required
time
Speed
Required
time
Speed
XP
1 hour
12 min. 5
x
6 min. 10
x
15 min. 4
x
15 min. 4
x
8 min. 35 s.
7
x
25 min. 2.4
x
15 min. 4
x
SP 6 min. 10
x
2 min. 25 s.
25
x
7 min. 30 s.
8
x
7 min. 30 s.
8
x
4 min. 10 s.
14
x
12 min. 30 s.
4.8
x
7 min. 30 s.
8
x
LP 3 min. 20
x
1 min. 15 s.
48
x
3 min. 45 s.
16
x
3 min. 45 s.
16
x
2 min. 25 s.
25
x
6 min. 15 s.
7.2
x
3 min. 45 s.
16
x
EP (6H) 2 min. 30
x
52 sec. 69
x
2 min. 30 s.
24
x
2 min. 30 s.
24
x
EP (8H)
1 min. 30 s.
40
x
42 sec. 86
x
1 min. 53 s.
32
x
1 min. 53 s.
32
x
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 5)
Regarding copying of digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 80) compatible DVD-
RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 45).
≥
You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording” titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.
Delete Navigator/Copying titles or playlists
EH65.book Page 51 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
52
RQT8432
Copying titles or playlists
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] > [RAM] : High speed
[HDD]
>
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[+RW]
: Refer to the following table.
≥
[+R]
[+R]DL]
[+RW]
When making a copy that contains titles recorded in “EP”
mode or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed ),
copy will be performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).
≥If the copy destination disc space is exceeded, copy will be
performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 67) when:
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 67)
and you are copying in XP mode.
Copying 16:9 aspect titles
The titles are copied in 4:3 aspect if you copy to a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
[Note]
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or
NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 4, 5).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
[HDD]
>
[RAM]
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalized discs.)
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [ENTER].
4 After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-
only and you can no longer record or edit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
Copy starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To stop copying ➡ 54
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
functions ➡ 54
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[SUB MENU].
2Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [ENTER].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.
Sort:
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
[Note]
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording compatible DVD-
R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 66).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 53).
Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 66) Copy speed
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”.
High speed
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
Normal speed
(Recording mode is
FR.)
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
Before copying
Copy
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalized (➡ 81). After finalizing, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
3,4,2,1
ENTER
∫
SUB MENU
:, 9
RETURN
;
1
FUNCTIONS
STATUS
Numbered
buttons
“Green”
“Red”
COPY Navigator
Page 01/01
HDD
001
ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
002
003
004
005
006
007
---
Name of titleTimeNo. Name Date Day
008
ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
RETURN
ENTER
SUB MENU
S
Select
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size: 0MB( 0%)
Total : 0
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
COPY Navigator
Page 01/01
HDD
001
ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
002
003
004
005
006
007
---
Name of titleTimeNo. Name Date Day
008
ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
RETURN
ENTER
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size: 0MB( 0%)
Total : 0
Sort
Properties
EH65.book Page 52 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
53
RQT8432
[HDD]
,-.
[RAM]
[+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
>
[HDD]
[HDD]
>
[-R]
[-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD]
>
[HDD]
[RAM]
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
See also the notes “Before copying” (➡ 52).
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [ENTER].
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2
Press
[3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER]
.
3
Press
[3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [ENTER]
.
4
Press
[3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press
[ENTER]
.
5
Press
[3, 4]
to select the mode and press
[ENTER]
.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and
press [ENTER].
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “ ” or
“ ” can be registered.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “ ” can
be registered.
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER]
(➡ below, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 54)
You can register a multiple number of titles and
playlists on the copying list by repeating
steps 2–4.
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(➡ 54) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
5 Press [2] to confirm.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording
compatible DVD-R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating
becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 66).
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalize” or
“Copy Only” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy & Finalize” is selected
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
Copy
HDD
DVD
1
2
3
Source
Destination
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
Start Copying
HDD > DVD
VIDEO High Speed
0
Select the copy direction.
ENTER
RETURN
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is cancelled.
Page 01/01
Copy
Create copy list.
Size: 0MB
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
1
2
3
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
Start Copying
HDD > DVD
VIDEO High Speed
Name of item
( 0%)
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
HDD
Create List
Previous Page 02/02 Next
007
ARD 10.10. FRI
008 0:30(XP)
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
- - -- - -- - -
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
Previous
Next
Playlists
VIDEO
Select
Copying titles or playlists
(Continued on the next page)
EH65.book Page 53 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
54
RQT8432
Copying titles or playlists
(Continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 52.
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ 53, right column)
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and
press [ENTER].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ 53, Multiple editing).
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 53, left column)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
∫ To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalizing)
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only
recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the
point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled
before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
≥When copying to a DVD-R DL or
+R DL
only the titles that have
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
≥Still pictures cannot be played.
Press [ENTER] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalize them after
copy.
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
(➡ 26)
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (➡ 26)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying.
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
Data size of each registered item
Size:
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Size: 0MB
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
New item (Total=0)
(0%)
No. Size
Name of item
Add
Delete
Move
Delete All
EH65.book Page 54 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
55
RQT8432
[DVD-V]
>
[HDD]
You can copy the content of finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalized disc (➡ 34).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Video”) (➡ 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
6 Set “Copy Time”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 7).
∫Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [ENTER].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [ENTER].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER] to start
copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalizing
the disc (➡ 62).
8 When the top menu is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[ENTER].
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
[Note]
≥The screen saver on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalized DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 53, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card with
this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying MPEG2.
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥The following cannot be copied: DVD-Audio, Video CD, Audio
CD and so on.
Copy
Min.
Press ENTER to change settings.
1
2
3
Hour
00
2
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Copy Time
Start Copying
DVD > HDD
DVD-Video XP
ENTER
RETURN
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from
an SD card
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press
[ENTER]. Then go to step 7 on page 53.
≥MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card are automatically
registered on the copy list.
≥If there are no MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card, “Copy
Video (MPEG2)” is not displayed.
My favorite 01/02
01
Chapter 1
03
05
02
04
06
Chapter 2
Chapter 3 Chapter 4
MPEG2
HDD
DVD-RAM
VIDEO
§
§
Conventionally recorded programmes
SD Card
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Album View
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 53)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source:SD CARD
Copy Mode:
Format:VIDEO
Copying titles or playlists
EH65.book Page 55 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
56
RQT8432
Copying still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R or CD-R/CD-RW.
[SD]
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)”, press [ENTER] and
then go to step 4 on page 57, “Copying all the still pictures on a
card—Copy All Pictures”.
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [ENTER].
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press
[1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4
Press [
3
, 4]
to select “Destination” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2
Press
[3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER]
.
3
Press
[3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [ENTER]
.
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
6 Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
∫ To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[ENTER].
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)
You can register a multiple number of still pictures on
the copying list by repeating steps 2–3.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2
Press [
3
, 4]
to select “Picture/Folder” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 57,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 57)
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 57)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 57)
You can register a multiple number of folders on the
copying list by repeating steps 4–5.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
≥For individual still pictures only
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Copying using the copying list
;
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
STATUS
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
DRIVE
SELECT
:, 9
SUB MENU
FUNCTIONS
Numbered
buttons
SD Card
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Album View
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Copy
SD CARD
HDD
1
2
3
Source
Destination
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
SD CARD > HDD
PICTURE
High Speed
0
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
No. Size
1
2
3
Cancel All
Picture
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
Picture/Folder
Start Copying
SD CARD > HDD
PICTURE
High Speed
Name of item
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
New item (Total=0)
ENTER
RETURN
SUB MENU
S
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
No. Size
1
2
Cancel All
Picture
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Picture/Folder
SD CARD > HDD
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
Folder
Make a new folder and dub ?
New folder
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
---
-
New folder
EH65.book Page 56 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
57
RQT8432
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–3 (for a still picture) or 6–5
(for a folder) (➡ 56, right column)
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added
and press [ENTER].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple editing).
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
∫ To select another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
If you want to switch to another higher folder (➡ below).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
folders recognizable, while the screen on
the right appears
1 Press [SUB MENU] and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select the higher
folder and press [ENTER].
You cannot register a folder with a
different higher folder to the same
list.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
folder and press [ENTER].
[SD]
>
[HDD]
or
[RAM]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Pictures” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
and press [ENTER].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Add
Delete
Delete All
Create List Picture (JPEG)
Previous
001/001
Next
Folder 103__DVD
---- ---- ----
ENTER
RETURN
Page
0001
0002
0003
0004
----
----
----
--------
ENTER
RETURN
Folder
Create List
SD CARDSD CARD SD CARD
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
---
\DCIM\100__DVD
---
---
---
004 103__DVD
SUB MENU
S
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
\DCIM\100__DVD
004 103__DVD
Select Folder
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
Press ENTER to set.
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Copying all the still pictures on a card—
Copy All Pictures
[Note]
≥When copying the still pictures on a folder by folder basis
(➡ 56) or card by card basis (➡ above, Copy All Pictures), files
other than the still picture files inside the folder will also be
copied. (This does not apply to the lower folders contained
inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing
still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 37), copying
will stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, it is
possible that this folder’s name will not be the same on the copy
destination. It is recommended that you input a folder name
before copying (➡ 49, Enter Album Name).
≥You cannot copy the information about the print number setting
(DPOF) or the picture rotation.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
Copy All Pictures
Copy from
SD CARD
Copy to
HDD
Copying still pictures
EH65.book Page 57 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
58
RQT8432
Copying from a video cassette recorder
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” in
the Setup menu (➡ 67).
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
[Note]
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 8, Important notes for
recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 43).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
1 While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
2 Start play on the other equipment.
3 When you want to start recording
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 27), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the play list is created automatically.
Preparation
1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left column).
2 Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
4 Pause play of the DV equipment at the point you want recording
to start.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 70).
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears.
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to
HDD” or “Rec to DVD” and press
[ENTER].
You can proceed to step 4.
≥When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec”
and press [ENTER].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
press [ENTER].
Recording starts.
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
automatic recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
Manual recording
STIME SLIP
SDISPLAY
SSSTATUS
OAUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
3,4,2,1
ENTER
DRIVE SELECT
;
INPUT SELECT
REC MODE
¥ REC
FUNCTIONS
∫
OPEN/CLOSE
DRIVE
SELECT
k
1.3
1. 3
REC
EXT LINK
CH
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
-AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
L/MONO - AUDIO IN - R
VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
DV IN
Audio/Video
cable
S Video
cable
§
Yellow White Red
This unit
Other video equipment
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left column).
DV Auto Rec
Rec to HDD Rec to DVD Cancel
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
EH65.book Page 58 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
59
RQT8432
Linked operations with the TV [Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control
TM
)/Q Link]
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using HDAVI Control or Q Link.
Preparation
1. Connect this unit to your TV or receiver with an HDMI cable
(➡ 17).
2. Set “Control with HDMI/Q Link” to “HDMI and Q Link” (➡ 68).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Q Link”.)
3. Set the HDAVI Control operations on the connected equipment
(e.g., TV).
≥When using HDMI2 terminal of VIERA as HDAVI Control, set
the input channel to HDMI2 on VIERA.
4. Turn on all HDAVI Control compatible equipment and select this
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the HDAVI
Control function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
Preparation
≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(➡ 14).
For your reference
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar
function to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
What you can do with HDAVI Control and Q Link
§1
This button is available only when this unit is on.
§2
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
[Note]
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About HDAVI Control function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
What is HDAVI Control?
HDAVI Control is a convenient function that offers linked
operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver
under HDAVI Control. You can use this function by connecting
the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
What is Q Link?
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of
this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by
connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
Download from the TV
[Q]Link]
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV
to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as
on the TV (➡ 18).
(When the TV is on)
Easy playback
[HDAVI]Control]
[Q]Link]
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically switch the input
channel and displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTIONS]
§1
, [1](PLAY)
§2
, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK].
When the operation is stopped, the screen will return to the input selected before Easy playback started.
(When the TV is off)
Power on link
[HDAVI]Control]
[Q]Link]
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTIONS]
§1
, [1](PLAY)
§2
, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK].
≥[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link
[HDAVI]Control]
[Q]Link]
When you turn the TV off, the unit is also automatically turned off. The unit automatically turns off even if
the FUNCTIONS screen, the status message or the on-screen menu is displayed, during playback or
when the unit is only timer recording.
Even if the TV is turned off, the unit will not turn off at the same time in the following conditions:
–when you pressed [¥ REC] and the unit is recording,
–when copying
–when finalizing
–during Preset Download, Auto-Setup, Auto Clock Setting, Child Lock and Manual Tuning
≥When this unit is connected to an HDAVI Control compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the
receiver will also turn off.
Direct TV Recording
[Q]Link]
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV
without having to change the channels on this unit.
≥However this function does not work if you select the TV channels on this unit when the unit and
the TV are connected with both an HDMI cable and a 21-pin Scart cable.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
The selected drive lights up on the unit’s display.
≥If you selected the DVD drive
Insert a disc. (➡ 24)
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Copying from a video cassette recorder/Linked operations with the TV [Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control
TM
)/Q Link]
EH65.book Page 59 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
60
RQT8432
HDD, disc and card management
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press
[ENTER].
e.g., [RAM]
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is
displayed.
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Protection” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.
[SD]
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [ENTER].
➡ 63, Entering text
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalized disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Common procedures
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
DRIVE SELECT
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
Remain
FUNCTIONS
30:00 SP
HDD
Recording
Playback
Copy
Delete
To Others
ShowView Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
HDD Management
ENTER
RETURN
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles 11
Used
Remain
0 : 22
5:38 (EP)
Off
Disc Name
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Disc Protection
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Setting the protection
Cartridge-protection
Providing a name for a disc
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles 11
Used
Remain
0 : 22
5:38 (EP)
On
Disc Name
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Disc Protection
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
PROTECT
LOCK
My favorite 01/02
01
Chapter 1
03
02
04
Chapter 2
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles 11
Used
Remain
0 : 22
5:38
(
Documentary
EH65.book Page 60 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
61
RQT8432
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
A message appears when finished.
7 Press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG, TIFF) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 60).
[Note]
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
7 Press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
Deleting all the contents of a disc or
card—Format
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
HDD, disc and card management
EH65.book Page 61 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
62
RQT8432
HDD, disc and card management
Refer to the control reference on page 60.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
Video top menu after finalizing.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [ENTER].
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 45,
Change Thumbnail)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalizing.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [ENTER].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalizing the disc.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalize” and
press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
A message appears when finalizing is finished.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥Finalizing takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalizing takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalizing.
This will render the disc unusable.
7 Press [ENTER].
[Note]
When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
≥You cannot finalize discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalize discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalized on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
http://www.panasonic-europe.com
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left
column) before creating top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 60)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
7 Press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Selecting the background style–Top Menu
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first–Auto-Play Select
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment–Finalize
1
4
7 8
5
2
9
6
3
Top Menu List
01
Display after finalizing
Title Name
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
After finalizing
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 61) although it becomes play-only after finalizing.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-
minute)
§
chapters, if
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
§
This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
Before
finalizing
After
finalizing
Recording/Editing/Entering name Yt
Play on other players tY
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
EH65.book Page 62 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
63
RQT8432
Entering text
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
§
Title name for timer recording
[Note]
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1 Show Enter Name screen.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [ENTER].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”
1
Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
3 Press [ENTER].
≥To enter a space
Press [¢] and press [ENTER].
≥Add/recall names (➡ below)
3 Press [∫] (Set).
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
To end partway
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalization (➡ 62). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
[HDD] [RAM] Characters
Title
64 (44
§
)
Playlist 64
Album of still pictures 36
Disc ([RAM])64
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Characters
Title 44
Disc 40
[SD] Characters
Album of still pictures 36
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 30, right
column.
Title
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 44.
Playlist
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 47.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 60.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 on page 48, “To edit
the album”.
¢
;
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
STATUS
AUDIO
DIRECT TV RECDIRECT TV REC
EXT LINKEXT LINK
REC MODEREC MODE
RECREC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
:, 9
SUB MENU
∫
Numbered
buttons
“Red”
“Green”
_
Enter Name
12345
ABC a
DEF d
GH I
NO
g
JKL j
M
m
678 90
bcij
ef/l %
hifl $
*
&
klON@
n ]
_
o[
Space
Set
Delete
PQRSp
TUV t
WXY Zw
qrs( )
uv{ }
-
xyz
`
^
|
!?
\
.
,
"
'
:
;
π
;
Top Menu Preview
ENTER
RETURN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Add to List
List Names
Standard Characters Other Characters
SELECT
¢
¡
£¤¥
«¬-
®
µ¶ ·
¸
¿Á
ÔÕÖ
Â
ÉÊË
Ì
Ó
¦§¨©ª
¯˚± ²
¹º»¼½
ÃÄ
Å
Æ
³
Ç
ÍÎÏ
À
Ñ
× Ú
ØÙ
Û
Space
ÝÞß
Ð
áà
çèé
ê
ñòóôõ
âãäåæ
ëìí î
ï
¾
´
È
Ò
ð
ö÷ø ú
þý
ù
û
ü
ÿ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Ü
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Press the “Red” button or
“Green” button to select
character type and press
[ENTER].
“Standard Characters”:
(➡ left, Alphabet characters,
etc.)
“Other Characters”:
(➡ below, Umlaut characters,
accented characters, etc.)
∫ To add a name
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 20
After entering the name (steps 1–2).
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9] to select
“
Add to List
”.
2Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
∫ To recall an added name
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:] to select
“
List Names
”.
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and
press [ENTER].
∫ To delete an added name
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:] to select
“
List Names
”.
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
3 Press [SUB MENU] to show “Delete Name” and press
[ENTER].
4Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [RETURN].
5
6
8
NO
JKL
M
PQR
TUV
7
7 7
7
_
Enter Name
12345
ABC a
DEF d
GH I g
678 90
bcij
ef/l %
hifl $
*
&
Top Menu Preview
1
2
3
4
Standard Characters Other Characters
Chapter 1_
Chapter 1
HDD, disc and card management/Entering text
EH65.book Page 63 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
64
RQT8432
FUNCTIONS window
By using the FUNCTIONS window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [ENTER].
≥If you select “To Others” and press [ENTER], the following
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[ENTER].
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
To exit the FUNCTIONS window
Press [FUNCTIONS].
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Press and hold [ENTER]
and [RETURN]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X
HOLD” disappears.
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
Remain
FUNCTIONS
30:00 SP
HDD
Recording
Playback
Copy
Delete
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
Remain
FUNCTIONS
30:00 SP
HDD
Recording
Playback
Copy
Delete
To Others
ShowView Record
Timer Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
HDD Management
ENTER
RETURN
“Timer Recording”
appears in countries
where the GUIDE Plus+
system is available.
Child Lock
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
5
VOLUME
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
EH65.book Page 64 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
65
RQT8432
Changing the unit’s settings
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and
press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
There may be differences in operation methods. If this happens,
follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.
(continued on the next page)
< OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN/CLOSE
DRIVE
SELECT
k
1.3
1. 3
REC
EXT LINK
CH
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
-AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
CH
W
X
∫
TIME SLIP
TIME SLIP
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
STATUS
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO
DIRECT TV REC
DIRECT TV REC
EXT LINK
EXT LINK
REC MODE
REC MODE
REC
REC
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CREATE
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
ENTER
ENTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
S
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
RETURN
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
S
PROG/CHECK
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE
STOP
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
SKIP
DELETE
DELETE
ShowView
ShowView
CH
CH
PAG E
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
0
9
8
7
6
54
3
2
1
VOLUME
VOLUME
CH
CH
AV
AV
Í
TV
TV
DRIVE
DRIVE
SELECT
SELECT
Í
DVD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
FUNCTIONS
Numbered
buttons
“Red”
“Green”
“Yellow”
Common procedures
Setup
Remote Control
Clock
Quick Start
DivX Registration
Initialize
DVD 1
On
Power Save
Off
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Tuning
Connection
Others
ENTER
RETURN
TAB
SELECT
Tabs
Menus Options
FUNCTIONS window/Child Lock/Changing the unit’s settings
EH65.book Page 65 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
66
RQT8432
Changing the unit’s settings
(continued)
Refer to the control reference on page 65.
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Summary of settings
Tabs Menus Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Tuning
Manual (➡ 69)
Auto-Setup Restart (➡ 70)
Download from TV (➡ 70)
Disc
Settings for Playback
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is
shown.
≥Do not forget your password.
≥8 No Limit
: All DVD-Video can be played.
≥1 to 7: Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
≥0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Unlock Recorder ≥Change Password
≥Change Level ≥Temporary Unlock
DVD-Audio Video mode Playback
Select “On” to play DVD-Video content on some DVD-Audio.
≥On: The setting returns to “Off” when you change the disc or
turn the unit off.
≥Off
Soundtrack
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and
disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite
any changes you make here.
≥In case of English/French/German/Italian/
Spanish/Dutch languages, when you make
download from TV, and Country setting of
Auto-Setup in plug-in, the language
(“Soundtrack”/“Menus”) will be same and
“Subtitle” will set to “Automatic”.
≥Enter a code (➡ 71) with the numbered
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
When the selected language is not available
on the disc, the default language is played.
There are discs where you can only switch the
language from the menu screen (➡ 35).
≥English
≥German ≥French ≥Italian
≥Spanish ≥Dutch
≥Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Subtitle ≥Automatic
: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will automatically
appear if available on that disc.
≥English ≥German ≥French ≥Italian
≥Spanish ≥Dutch
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Menus ≥English
≥German ≥French ≥Italian
≥Spanish ≥Dutch
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Settings for Recording
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP
mode (➡ 25, Recording modes and approximate recording
times).
≥EP (6 Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
≥EP (8 Hours)
:You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when
using “EP (8 Hours)”.
Rec for High Speed Copy
When high speed copying a title to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, it is necessary
to turn this setting “On” before recording to the HDD; however,
the screen size, etc. is restricted (➡ right). We recommend
turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is
not necessary when recording a programme.
≥On: Makes high speed mode copying to DVD-R, etc. possible.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
–Pictures are saved in 4:3.
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio
Selection” (➡ 67).
≥Off
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW
4X discs).
≥Maximum
≥Normal (Silent):
Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for
copying will double (approximately).
Picture
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 70).
≥On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.
≥Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play
(➡ 81, Frames and fields).
≥Automatic
≥Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
(The picture is coarser.)
≥Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and finer.)
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥On
: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View. Additionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
≥Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
EH65.book Page 66 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
67
RQT8432
(continued on the next page)
Tabs Menus Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Sound
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
≥On
≥Off
Bilingual Audio Selection
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type
when:
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 26).
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ below, “Audio Mode
for XP Recording”).
≥M1
≥M2
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select on the other equipment.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ below).
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 16).
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96
kHz or 88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy
protection.
≥On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
≥Off
: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when
the connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Dolby Digital Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal
and outputs it as 2 channels.
[Note]
Not making the proper settings may result
in noise or some trouble for digital
recording.
≥Bitstream
:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
DTS ≥Bitstream
: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS
logo.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS
logo.
MPEG ≥Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
≥PCM
: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG
decoder.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
mode.
≥Dolby Digital
(➡ 80)
≥LPCM (➡ 81)
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
that of normal XP mode recordings.
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s
DV input terminal (➡ 58).
≥Stereo 1
: Records audio (L1, R1).
≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
≥Mix: Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
Display
Language
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen
messages.
≥English ≥Deutsch ≥Français ≥Italiano
≥Español ≥Nederlands
On-Screen Messages
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.
≥Automatic
≥Off
Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
≥On
≥Off
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 68) to “On”.
≥Bright
≥Dim
≥Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this
mode, the standby power consumption can be
reduced.
Connection
TV Aspect (➡ 18) Set to match the type of
television connected.
≥16:9 ≥4:3 ≥Letterbox
Progressive (➡ 22)
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set
“AV1 Output” to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)”.
≥On ≥Off
TV System (➡ 70) ≥PAL ≥NTSC
Changing the unit’s settings
EH65.book Page 67 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
68
RQT8432
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 65.
Tabs Menus Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Connection
(continued)
HDMI Settings
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be
changed. However if you are concerned about output picture
quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.
Still pictures play at a resolution equivalent to 480p regardless
of the settings.
≥576i/480i
≥576p/480p
≥720p
≥1080i
≥Automatic
: Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080i, 720p,
576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Aspect for 4:3 Video ≥4:3
: Picture is output as original aspect.
≥16:9: Picture is output as 16:9 aspect with side panels.
Digital Audio Output ≥HDMI and Optical
≥Optical Only: Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier
with an optical digital audio cable and connected
to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to enjoy
the highest quality of audio from discs (➡ 16).
Control with HDMI/Q Link ≥HDMI and Q Link
≥Q Link Only: Select when you do not want to use Control with
HDMI.
AV1 Output
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.
Select “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)” for RGB output.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”
for component output (progressive output).
Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV.
When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 (without
component)”.
≥If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
≥
Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
≥
S Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.
≥RGB 1 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
≥RGB 2 (without component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit
only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
AV2 Settings (Set to match the connected equipment.)
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
AV2 Input
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording
RGB output from external equipment.
≥RGB/Video
≥RGB
≥Video ≥S Video
AV2 Connection
This setting is fixed with “Ext” if you set “TV System” to
“NTSC” (➡ 70).
≥Decoder:When a decoder is connected to descramble the
scrambled signals (e.g., C+decoder).
≥
Ext: When the VCR or a digital/satellite receiver is connected.
Ext Link
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
“NTSC” (➡ 70).
≥Ext Link 1: When a digital/satellite receiver which transmits a
special control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart
cable is connected.
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by
the control signal.
≥Ext Link 2
: When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
When it turns on, recording starts.
When it turns off, recording stops.
Others
Remote Control (➡ 23) ≥DVD 1 ≥DVD 2 ≥DVD 3
Clock (➡ 71)
Power Save
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 67).
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
–When the unit is off, Pay TV programmes cannot be watched
on the TV because the signal from the connected decoder is
not looped through. To watch them, turn on the unit.
≥On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to
standby (➡ 82).
≥Off
:
(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
Quick Start
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
recording as quick as approx. 1 second
§
after turning it on. You can
start recording soon after deciding you want to record something.
§
Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
≥On
≥Off: Standby power consumption is less than when this is set
to “On”.
(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to
“Off”.)
DivX Registration
≥You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 39).
Initialize
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition ≥Ye s ≥No
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
Default Settings ≥Ye s ≥No
All the settings other than the programmed channels, time settings, country settings, language settings, disc language settings,
ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
EH65.book Page 68 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
69
RQT8432
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and
press [1].
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Manual” and
press [ENTER].
If you select “Yes” and press [ENTER], the following screen
appears.
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
To add a blank programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Green” button.
To move a TV station to another programme position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
the “Yellow” button.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to
which you want to assign the TV station and press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥When the unit connected to a Q Link compatible TV with a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable sets itself automatically (➡ 18), only
deletion of the programme position can be performed.
≥If you delete programme position of Host Channel, the GUIDE
Plus+ data is also deleted.
∫ To change the tuning settings for individual
programme position
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
to select a
programme position
and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
You can make the following two settings by selecting the external
input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4) in step 5.
≥Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)
In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match
the connected equipment.
≥Title Page (Auto/Off)
Tuning
Manual
Setup
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Tuning
Manual
Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV
Others
ENTER
RETURN
TAB
SELECT
Manual Tuning
NoYes
If you delete programme position
of Host channel, GUIDE Plus+ data
is also deleted. Continue?
Manual Tuning
Pos
Name
Ch
Pos
Name
Ch
Delete
Add
Move
1 ARD 4
2 ZDF
2
3 N3
5
4 HR3
8
5 BR3 10
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
Pos To change the programme position in which
the TV stations are assigned
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the
number of the desired programme position and
press [ENTER].
Name To enter or change the name of a TV station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [ENTER].
If the station name needs a blank space, select
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
Channel To enter newly available TV stations or change
the channel number of an already tuned TV
station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the channel number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[ENTER].
Fine Tuning To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [ENTER].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
Video
System
To select the video system type
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the
picture lacks colour, and press [ENTER].
Auto: This unit automatically distinguishes
PAL and SECAM signals.
PAL: For receiving PAL signals.
SECAM: For receiving SECAM signals.
Audio Mode To select the audio reception type
If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select
“BG” or “L” and press [ENTER].
BG: PAL B.G.H/SECAM B.G
L: SECAM L, L’
Mono To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if
you want to record the normal (mono) sound
during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM broadcast,
and press [ENTER].
Title Page To enter the Teletext title page for a channel
Entering title page number allows the unit to
automatically record programme and station
names.
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the
number and press [ENTER].
≥To find the correct title page for the station, refer
to its Teletext TV guide.
Pos
Name
Channel
Fine Tuning
Video System
1
4
Auto
RETURN : leave
Manual
Tuning
ARD
Auto
Audio Mode
BG
Mono
Off
Title Page
301
RETURN
SELECT
Changing the unit’s settings
EH65.book Page 69 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
70
RQT8432
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 65.
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (
➡
18) fails for some reason.
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 69)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup
Restart” or “Download from TV” and
press [ENTER].
The confirmation screen appears.
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a Q
Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV and
copied through this convenient function.)
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
≥If the country setting menu appears on the television
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press
[ENTER].
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
When the GUIDE Plus+ system setting message appears.
≥If you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Go to step 2 on page 19.
≥If you do not want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [ENTER].
Television picture appears. Setup is complete.
List of TV Reception Channels
§
Only for 8 MHz channel raster
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the
HDD.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”
and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV system
and press [ENTER].
≥PAL (factory preset)
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL
60.
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
≥NTSC
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television
programmes cannot be recorded properly.
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD.
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
∫ To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit for 5 or more seconds.
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be
used.
Restart set up
Channel
indication
TV Channel
Germany/Italy France
Other
Countries
2 – 4
E2 – E10
2 – 4
E2 – E12
5 – 10
5 – 10, G – J
(172.00 to
220.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
11 – 12
E11 – E12
(Germany)
H1 – H2 (Italy)
—
13 – 20
A – H (Only
Italy)
——
21 – 69 E21 – E69 E21 – E69 E21 – E69
74 – 78 S01 – S05 — S1 – S5
80 S1 — M1
81 – 89 S2 – S10
B – F
(100.00 to
172.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
M2 – M10
90 – 99 S11 – S20
K – Q (220.00
to 300.00 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
U1 – U10
121 – 141
S21 – S41
§
(Hyperband)
S21 – S41
(299.25 to
467.25 MHz)
(INTER
BANDE)
S21 – S41
(Hyperband)
TV System
Setup
TV System
PAL
NTSC
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Tuning
Connection
Others
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
EH65.book Page 70 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
71
RQT8432
≥In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [ENTER].
7 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
8 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
9 Press [ENTER] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time correction
function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times every day.
Manual Clock Setting
Usually, the unit’s setup function (➡ 18) automatically adjusts the clock to correct time. Under some reception conditions, however, the unit
cannot set the clock automatically.
In this case, follow the operation steps below to manually set the clock.
Clock
Automatic Off
Time Date
15
:
45 :
39
1
. 8
.
2006
Please set clock manually.
ENTER: store RETURN: leave
0 9
Number
ENTER
RETURN
SELECT
CHANGE
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian: 6566
Afar: 6565
Afrikaans: 6570
Albanian: 8381
Ameharic: 6577
Arabic: 6582
Armenian: 7289
Assamese: 6583
Aymara: 6589
Azerbaijani: 6590
Bashkir: 6665
Basque: 6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani: 6890
Bihari: 6672
Breton: 6682
Bulgarian: 6671
Burmese: 7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian: 7577
Catalan: 6765
Chinese: 9072
Corsican: 6779
Croatian: 7282
Czech: 6783
Danish: 6865
Dutch: 7876
English: 6978
Esperanto: 6979
Estonian: 6984
Faroese: 7079
Fiji: 7074
Finnish: 7073
French: 7082
Frisian: 7089
Galician: 7176
Georgian: 7565
German: 6869
Greek: 6976
Greenlandic: 7576
Guarani: 7178
Gujarati: 7185
Hausa: 7265
Hebrew: 7387
Hindi: 7273
Hungarian: 7285
Icelandic: 7383
Indonesian: 7378
Interlingua: 7365
Irish: 7165
Italian: 7384
Japanese: 7465
Javanese: 7487
Kannada: 7578
Kashmiri: 7583
Kazakh: 7575
Kirghiz: 7589
Korean: 7579
Kurdish: 7585
Laotian: 7679
Latin: 7665
Latvian, Lettish: 7686
Lingala: 7678
Lithuanian: 7684
Macedonian: 7775
Malagasy: 7771
Malay: 7783
Malayalam: 7776
Maltese: 7784
Maori: 7773
Marathi: 7782
Moldavian: 7779
Mongolian: 7778
Nauru: 7865
Nepali: 7869
Norwegian: 7879
Oriya: 7982
Pashto, Pushto: 8083
Persian: 7065
Polish: 8076
Portuguese: 8084
Punjabi: 8065
Quechua: 8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian: 8279
Russian: 8285
Samoan: 8377
Sanskrit: 8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian: 8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona: 8378
Sindhi: 8368
Singhalese: 8373
Slovak: 8375
Slovenian: 8376
Somali: 8379
Spanish: 6983
Sundanese: 8385
Swahili: 8387
Swedish: 8386
Tagalog: 8476
Tajik: 8471
Tamil: 8465
Tatar: 8484
Telugu: 8469
Thai: 8472
Tibetan: 6679
Tigrinya: 8473
Tonga: 8479
Turkish: 8482
Turkmen: 8475
Twi: 8487
Ukrainian: 8575
Urdu: 8582
Uzbek: 8590
Vietnamese: 8673
Volapük: 8679
Welsh: 6789
Wolof: 8779
Xhosa: 8872
Yiddish: 7473
Yoruba: 8979
Zulu: 9085
Changing the unit’s settings
EH65.book Page 71 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
72
RQT8432
Messages
On the television Page
Authorization Error. ≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
38, 39
Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of times you can record the program is exceeded.
—
—
24
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
70
Cannot record on the disc. ≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. 10
Unable to format.
Cannot play on this unit. ≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
37
13
Cannot output Audio with HDMI
because of copyright protection.
≥Should you connect equipment that does not support CPPM the audio from the CPPM
copy protected DVD-Audio cannot be output from HDMI AV OUT terminal. Connect the
audio cables (red, white), optical digital cable or the 21-pin Scart cable
§
to the
corresponding terminals.
§
Only when this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
17
Cannot record. Disc is full. ≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
≥Use a new disc.
45, 50,
61
—
Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.
No Disc ≥The disc may be upside down. —
No folders. ≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. 7, 37
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
13
7
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
45, 49,
50, 61
54, 57
This is a non-recordable disc. ≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVD-
R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
4–5
61
—
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTIONS menu.
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unnecessary titles.
≥
[-R]DL]
[+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
50
Rental Expired. ≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) 39
$
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc. —
EH65.book Page 72 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
73
RQT8432
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
Page
§
The message are alternately displayed.
DVD
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same time for
more than 2 seconds.
23
GUIDE ≥GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded. 20
HARD ERR
§
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. —
No AUDIO
§
≥When connecting to CPPM incompatible equipment with an HDMI cable, CPPM copy protected DVD-
Audio cannot output audio through the HDMI AV OUT terminal. Connect the audio cables (red, white),
optical digital cable or the 21-pin Scart cable
§
to the corresponding terminals.
§
Only when this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
17
NoERAS ≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
NoREAD ≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the DVD-RAM lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
10
10
NoWRIT ≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
PLEASE WAIT
§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait
until the message disappears.
—
PROG FULL
§
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. 31
SLEEP ≥In order to extend HDD life, the HDD is in SLEEP mode. 9
SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”,”LP” and the numbers
are examples.
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151
hours”.
—
UNFORMAT
§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
61
UNSUPPORT
§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. 4–6
F74 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction. —
F75 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction. —
U59 ≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.
—
U61 ≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
—
U71 ≥The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible. —
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–The HDMI cable is too long. Please use a cable 5.0 meters or less.
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
—
U88 ≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
76
U99 ≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby. Now press
[Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
—
H or F ≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service
.
—
76–80
X HOLD ≥The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.
64
Messages
EH65.book Page 73 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
74
RQT8432
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up Page
Disc
Recording
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.
≥An amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard version 1.1 must be connected to
this unit to play multi-channel audio on a DVD-Audio.
16, 17
17
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc. 16
The television has a Scart terminal and
component video input terminal. Which
should I connect with?
≥If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube) we recommend using the Scart
terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB
compatible television.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.
14–16
Is my television progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p input terminals
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
—
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and
Video CDs bought in another country?
≥You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “2” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Cover
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.
—
Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.
≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
4–6
—
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW
compatibility with this unit.
≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still
pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
6, 37
—
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording
is usually not possible.
—
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
recorded on this unit be played on other
equipment?
≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
—
—
Can I record digital audio signals using
this unit?
≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on this unit are for output
only. (The audio recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a digital video
camcorder, for example, is recorded digitally.)
—
Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion: On
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
67
—
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.
36
67
Can I high speed copy to a disc? ≥Yes, you can.
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
51
EH65.book Page 74 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
75
RQT8432
GUIDE Plus+
Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only
available after approx. 2 hours?
≥The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited. Depending on the country, signal
quality and number of channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is ready
can vary.
—
The Host Channel in France is Canal
Plus. Do I have to sign a contract with
Canal Plus in order to be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system?
≥No, you can use the GUIDE Plus+ system without a contract. —
How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data
updated and when?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the television station
transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at
2:50 AM every day.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit is turned off.
20
Is it possible to programme a recording,
with a start and end time that are
different from the GUIDE Plus+ system?
≥You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording
menu.
30
Does the GUIDE Plus+ system support
VPS/PDC?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system works independently of VPS/PDC. However, you can
programme TIMER recordings with VPS/PDC in the Timer Recording menu.
32
How can I cancel a TIMER
programming?
≥The “F” symbol appears in the GUIDE Plus+ when a Timer Recording is programmed
with the GUIDE Plus+ system. To cancel a Timer Recording programming, press [PROG/
CHECK]. Select the desired entry and press [¢].
31
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data
via a connected satellite receiver or a
Set Top Box?
≥No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set
Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming.
30, 33
What happens when I unplug my unit
from the power outlet?
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from the
power supply for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost. Make sure
that the time is set again appropriately.
—
What happens if my postal code
changes, e.g. if I move?
≥Change the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ Setup menu. If necessary, perform a full
Auto-Setup. Saved GUIDE Plus+ data may be lost.
21
Frequently asked questions
EH65.book Page 75 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
76
RQT8432
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
Power Page
Displays
TV screen and video
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
≥A sound is heard when the HDD goes into SLEEP mode, or
operations are slow to respond in SLEEP mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode
(➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
No power.
The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].
≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
14, 15
33
The unit switches to standby mode.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on. —
The display is dim. ≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. 67
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
≥Set the clock. 71
The time recorded on the disc and
the available time shown do not
add up.
The play time shown for MP3
does not agree with the actual
time.
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
increase in disc space.
≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
—
—
—
—
—
The clock is not correct. ≥Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not work.
In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting
does not work, set the time manually.
71
Compared to the actual recorded
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
—
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
—
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It
can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
—
Status messages do not appear. ≥Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu. 67
The grey background does not
appear.
≥Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. 67
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
—
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
Screen size is wrong.
≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
≥
If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “
16:9
” in the Setup menu.
43
67
68
The recorded title is stretched
vertically.
≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” in
the Setup menu.
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
66
There is a lot of after-image when
playing video.
≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. 43
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
43
There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video. —
The images from this unit do not
appear on the television.
Picture is distorted.
≥Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal, VIDEO OUT terminal,
S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds
to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
≥When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV
system.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
14–17
—
—
70
—
—
EH65.book Page 76 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
77
RQT8432
Sound Page
Operation
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
amplifier if you have connected one.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.
≥[DVD-A] The disc may have a restriction on the method of audio output.
This unit cannot playback multi-channel discs that prevent down-mixing unless the unit is
connected with an HDMI cable to an amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard
version 1.1. Refer to the disc jacket for more information.
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected
with an HDMI cable.
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
14–16,
67
36
43
—
—
—
—
68
—
26
Cannot switch audio. ≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
≥The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables.
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
—
67
26
16, 17,
67
—
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
control.
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same
time for more than 2 seconds.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.
23
23
11
—
—
—
23
23
64
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
1Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
2Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.
24, 34
—
—
—
HDD activation is slow. ≥The HDD is in SLEEP mode. (“SLEEP” appears in the unit’s display.) 9
Cannot eject disc. ≥The unit is recording.
≥Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.
—
33
64
Cannot tune channels.
Cannot download channel
presets from the television.
≥Check the connections.
≥You must connect to a television equipped with the Q Link function with a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable to download channel presets.
14–15
—
Startup is slow. ≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
68
—
Takes time to read DVD-RAM. ≥It may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the first time in this unit or it has not been
used for a long time.
—
Troubleshooting guide
EH65.book Page 77 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
78
RQT8432
Troubleshooting guide
Recording, timer recording and copying Page
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD
Management.
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥
[-R]DL]
[+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
HDD and then copy.
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalized discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types
of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and
NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
4, 5
61
60
80
45, 50,
61
—
45, 50,
61
—
—
—
—
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
≥Select the input channel (“AV2”, “AV3”, “AV4” or “DV”) for the equipment you have connected.
14–15,
58
—
Timer recording does not work
properly.
S
HOWVIEW programming does not
work properly.
≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the
programme.
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording
list is not on.)
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.
≥Set the clock.
≥(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It takes approximately 2 hours
to complete data download. If you want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off”.
31
31
71
21
Timer recording does not stop
even when [∫] is pressed.
≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive.
≥When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L”
disappears.)
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
31
33
—
The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.
≥The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly. 30
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
—
61
The programme name and the
recorded title do not match.
≥There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has
the old programme name.
—
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
disc using the high speed mode.
≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in EP or FR (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode, you cannot
perform high-speed copy.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
26
—
—
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.
≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.
—
—
—
An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.
≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
—
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
58
—
—
—
58
EH65.book Page 78 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
79
RQT8432
Play Page
Edit
Still pictures
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
34
10
4–6
—
—
66
—
39
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
—
—
—
5
DVD-Video is not played. ≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting. 66
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
—
35
No subtitles. ≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
—
42
Angle cannot be changed. ≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded. —
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
—
Quick View does not work. ≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
—
—
The resume play function does
not work.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–press [∫] several times.
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).
–[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] [SD] turn off the power.
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.
—
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during
search.
70
—
Time Slip does not work. ≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
recorded on the disc.
70
It takes time before play starts. ≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX) —
Picture stops. ≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX) —
Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.
≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
50
—
Cannot edit. ≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
50
Cannot format. ≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
10
4–6
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a
start point.
—
—
—
Cannot delete chapters. ≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer. 45
Cannot create a playlist. ≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.
—
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit is standing by for
linked timer recording with external equipment.
—
Cannot edit or format a card. ≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
60
The contents of the card cannot
be read.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
Format using FAT 12 or FAT 16 with other equipment or format the card with this unit.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this
unit.
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB.
7, 37
61
7
—
—
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or
card.
—
61
Troubleshooting guide
EH65.book Page 79 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
80
RQT8432
Troubleshooting guide
GUIDE Plus+
To reset this unit
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CPPM (Content Protection for Prerecorded Media)
A copy protection system used for DVD-Audio files. This unit
supports CPPM.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
DivX
A video compression format developed by DivXNetworks, Inc. that
compresses video files without any considerable loss of video
quality.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
[DVD-A] Tracks that do not allow down-mixing will not play correctly
on this unit except when connecting with an HDMI cable to an
amplifier that meets HDMI Ver. 1.1 standards and is CPPM
compatible.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
DPOF is the standard printing format for still picture data taken by a
digital camera, etc. It is used for automatic printing at a photo
developing store or on your home printer.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of
data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
The GUIDE Plus+ System does
not receive any data.
≥Check whether GUIDE Plus+ system setup was performed in full.
The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several times each day. When the unit is first
connected, the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data.
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.
Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately one day before you can
display the television programme list.
≥Check whether the clock is properly set.
≥If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE Plus+ system may not
be able to receive any data.
19–21
71
—
“No Data” is displayed for some
or all stations.
≥These stations may not have been able to be identified automatically.
For these stations, select the “On” in the SUB MENU under “Editor” and assign the correct
reference station manually.
≥Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.
20
—
The GUIDE Plus+ information is
not displayed properly.
≥The reference station is not assigned correctly in “Editor”.
Select the correct reference station.
≥There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+ system provider or
station provider.
20
—
The GUIDE Plus+ data transfer
was interrupted.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.
≥The programme information may be incomplete.
—
—
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not
updated.
≥The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode
(EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.
≥Make sure that the time is set correctly.
≥Check whether “Off” is set under “Night Download” and change the setting in GUIDE Plus+.
—
—
21
“No Data” is displayed in the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
≥Programme the Timer recording manually or via S
HOWVIEW. 30
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset
≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level, ratings password and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the
programmed channels, time settings, country settings, language settings, disc language
settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Country setting screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and time settings return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
68
68
—
To reset the ratings level
settings
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
—
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated
≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.) —
Glossary
EH65.book Page 80 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
81
RQT8432
Electronic Programme Guide (EPG)
This is a system used to display the television programme list on
televisions, computers and cellular phones. Data is transmitted using
the internet or television waves. This unit is compatible with the
method using television waves. You can use the television
programme list for functions such as timer recording.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30
frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalize
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can be formatted to
become recordable.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk or memory card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG, TIFF) and MPEG2 are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD Memory Cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit. Formatting deletes irrevocably all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI is a next-generation digital interface for consumer electronic
products. Unlike conventional connections, it transmits
uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This
unit supports high-definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i
(1125i)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video
a high definition compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
MPEG2 moving picture files shot with a Panasonic SD multi-camera,
etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality. You can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and
CD-RW.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan:The sides are cut off so the picture fills
the screen.
Letterbox:Black bands appear at the top and bottom
of the picture so the picture itself appears in
an aspect ratio of 16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 625 (or 576) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 625p (or 576p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 525i (or 480i) and 525p (or 480p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures,
a common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/60
th
of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/60
th
of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
u
r
Frame Field Field
Troubleshooting guide/Glossary
EH65.book Page 81 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
82
RQT8432
Specifications
Recording system DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM: Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver.2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
DVD-R: for General Ver. 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver.2.x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
for General Ver.2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver.3.0
for DL Ver.3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
DVD-RW: Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.x/2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.x/4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
Ver. 1.x/6X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 3.0
+R: Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.3
for DL Ver.1.0
+RW: Ver. 1.1
Ver.1.2/4X-SPEED
Recording time Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
Maximum Approx. 443 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 111 hours
LP: Approx. 222 hours, EP: Approx. 333 hours/443 hours
Playable discs
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3, JPEG, DivX
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD
§
1
, MP3, JPEG, DivX formatted discs)
SVCD
§1
Internal HDD capacity 250 GB
Optical pick-up System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD 780 nm wave length
DVD 662 nm wave length
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
NORSK
Bølgelengde:
CD 780 nm
DVD 662 nm
Laserstyrke: Ingen farlig stråling sendes ut
Audio
Recording system: Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input impedance: More than 10 k≠
Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output impedance: Less than 1 k≠
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
HDMI Output 19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMI HDMI Ver.1.2a (EDID Ver.1.3)
Video
Video system:
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB in (PAL): AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
P
B: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
P
R: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Television system
RF converter output: Not provided
SD card slot
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
Still picture (JPEG, TIFF)
Compatible media: SD Memory Card
§2
, MultiMediaCard
Format: FAT12, FAT16
Image file format:
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
(sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
TIFF (Uncompressed RGB chunky), DPOF Compatible
Number of pixels: 34 a 34 to 6144 a 4096
Thawing time: Approx. 3 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
SD Video (MPEG2)
Compatible media: SD Memory Card
§2
, MultiMediaCard
Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
File Format: SD-Video format conforming
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card
to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc, the playback is possible.
DV input IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
Others
Region code:
‚ 2
Operating temperature: 5 to 40 oC
Operating humidity range: 10 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
Power supply: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power consumption: Approx. 34 W
Dimensions (WkDkH): Approx. 430 mmk329 mmk58 mm
Mass: Approx. 4.2 kg
[Note]
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mass and dimensions are approximate.
§1
Conforming to IEC62107
§2
Includes miniSD
TM
cards. (A miniSD
TM
adaptor needs to be
inserted.)
≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Memory Card).
Tuner system Channel coverage
PA L-BGH
SECAM-BG
(CCIR)
VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy)
UHF: 21–69
CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),
S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41
SECAM-L, L’
(France)
VHF: 2–10
UHF: 21–69
CATV: B–Q (100.5 to 299.5 MHz),
S21–S41 (299.5 to 467.25 MHz)
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)
EH65.book Page 82 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
83
RQT8432
Safety precautions
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Placement
Voltage
AC mains lead protection
Foreign matter
Service
Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment (private households)
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points, where they will
be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return your products to your
local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. Please contact your
local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
≥SD logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
≥miniSD™ is a trademark of SD Card Association.
Official DivX Certified™
product.
Plays DivX
®
5, DivX
®
4, DivX
®
3, and DivX
®
VOD video content (in
compliance with DivX Certified™ technical requirements).
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.
GUIDE Plus+, S
HOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)
subject of various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
and/or its related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR
ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM
SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE
PLUSi SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV
GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH
THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION,
EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM.
Specifications/Safety precautions
EH65.book Page 83 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
Index
Album
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Audio
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 32
AV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Channel
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 44
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Amplifier, system component . . . . . . . 16
Digital receiver,
satellite receiver, decoder . . . . . . . . . 15
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–17
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . 14, 16
Copy
SD card (MPEG2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CPPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 45
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Delete
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DELETE Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Dialog Enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 34, 40, 44, 48
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37–39, 80
DPOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 80
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment– Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ext Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 68
Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 62, 81
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 61, 81
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 25
FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 19–21, 28–29
HDAVI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 68, 81
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . 8
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 81
Language
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 81
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38–39
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39
Name
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 45
Noise reduction (NR)
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
On-screen
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
PCM Down Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 66
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 43, 81
Properties
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protection
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Rec for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . 26, 66
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 58
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–32
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
RGB
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 13
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Shipping Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
S
HOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 27
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 81
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–32
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tuning
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
VPS/PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
V.S.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/
p
RQT8432-L
F0306EN0
EH65.book Page 84 Thursday, March 23, 2006 5:18 PM
… 76 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
3

Forum

Panasonic-DMR-EH65

  • DNR-EH60
    de afstandsbediening werkt niet meer
    ik heb de batterijen er al een dag uitgehaald
    is hier misschien een kode nodig?
    wie kan mij helpen? Gesteld op 30-1-2021 om 14:44

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Op het display van de dvd recorder staat een lichtje met HDD . Dvd reageert nu nergens op en doet niets meer . Hoe krijg ik dat lichtje eraf. Gesteld op 17-12-2019 om 16:53

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • Het wissen lukt niet, hij geeft dan aan: kan niet bewerken met Ext link.
    Hoe dit op te lossen? Gesteld op 31-1-2018 om 14:49

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Dans de recorder ingesteld voor Ext-Link (opnemen van een extern apparaat). Druk nogmaals op de Ext-L toets op het apparaat, houd deze even ingedrukt, of haal minimaal 10 minuten de spanning geheel van het apparaat als voorgaand niet werkt. Door een software issue zijn de recorders soms n.l. moeilijk van deze stand te krijgen.

      Mvg, Willem Geantwoord op 31-1-2018 om 17:10

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Mijn cd speler geeft plaese aan. Verder reageerde het nergens op. Heb stroom er afgehaald. Nu geeft display helemaal niets meer aan. Wat ken dat zijn Gesteld op 1-12-2017 om 18:39

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • dat zal 'please wait" zijn geweest. Blijft de recorder daarop staan is er iets mis. Dat kan softwarematig zijn of hardwarematig, maar als er na het afhalen van de spanning niets meer gebeurt wijst dat vaak op een defect. meestal is dat de voeding, welke doorgaans nog redelijk goedkoop te herstellen is.

      Willem Geantwoord op 2-12-2017 om 18:46

      Waardeer dit antwoord (2) Misbruik melden

  • Nee Willem het is niets de spanning. Heb stroom na de zekering. Geantwoord op 2-12-2017 om 19:56

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Dat zegt niet alles. Na de zekering is nog het e.e.a. aan elektronica aanwezig en daar zit vaak de fout. Dat komt zeer vaak voor. vooral de elco's in de voeding laten het vaak afweten na langere tijd, maar de zekering blijft dan doorgaans gewoon heel. Die gaat pas stuk als er echt sprake is van een kortsluiting in de voeding of daarachter.

    Willem Geantwoord op 2-12-2017 om 20:11

    Waardeer dit antwoord (2) Misbruik melden

  • Als je het apparaat toch open hebt, kijk dan eens of je elektrolytische condensators ziet (Elco's) welke bol staan. Dat is iets wat je b.v. veelvuldig ziet. met wat handigheid zijn deze heel goed door jezelf te vervangen. Hebben deze geen andere componenten 'meegenomen' is de kans groot dat daarna alles weer werkt.

    Willem Geantwoord op 2-12-2017 om 20:17

    Waardeer dit antwoord (1) Misbruik melden

  • Hoe kan ik de kapotte elco vinden. Of gaat steeds de zelfde kapot. Ik heb nog spanning voor het geheugen. Geantwoord op 2-12-2017 om 20:25

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Zoals gezegd staan deze dan wat bol. Dat is duidelijk te zien aan de bovenzijde van de elco's. Maar uiteraard is er wel wat technische kennis nodig het apparaat te repareren. ontbreekt dat, wat niet verkeerd is bedoeld, kun je het apparaat beter even ter reparatie aanbieden bij een bedrijf of technicus.

    Willem Geantwoord op 3-12-2017 om 00:34

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Maar ik vraag me ook af hoe je ziet dat je spanning hebt voor het geheugen... Geantwoord op 3-12-2017 om 00:37

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Hallo Willem. Ik heb spanning op het stekkertje dat het geheugen in gaat.
    Cas Geantwoord op 3-12-2017 om 13:27

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Dag Cas,

    oké duidelijk. mar de voeding bestaat uit meer spanningen en dus zegt het ook nog niet zoveel als je op een deel van het apparaat nog spanning meet. Ik denk dat je er goed aan doet het apparaat gewoon eens te laten onderzoeken. Er zijn bedrijven welke geen onderzoekskosten vragen als je besluit de recorder niet te laten repareren. het zoeken daarna kan dus zeker lonen daar er ook bedrijven zijn de daarvoor 40-50 euro of soms zelfs meer rekenen.

    Mvg. Willem
    Ondersteuning Humax/Quantis electronics Geantwoord op 3-12-2017 om 18:52

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Met deze recorder kan ik momenteel
    wel opnemen, maar de opgenomen
    programma’s via het sub menu niet
    meer wissen. Is er een andere mogelijkheid. Ik vermoed, dat er een of andere ondersteuning niet meer actief is.
    Heeft u hier een oplossing voor. Gesteld op 29-11-2017 om 13:47

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • In dat is het raadzaam de recorder minstens 10 minuten geheel spanningsloos te zetten door de stekker uit de contactdos te nemen. Als dat niet baat, herhaal dit dan nogmaals. Leid het tot niets, dan kan een fabrieksreset wellicht de oplossing bieden. De opnames blijven daarbij bewaard.

      Willem Geantwoord op 2-12-2017 om 19:21

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Recorder gaat , na overschakelen van tv naar recorder , vanzelf naar circa 30 sec. uit.
    Dit doet hij periodiek nu weer zo'n avond dat we geen opgenomen programma's kunnen zien.
    Herkent iemand dit ?
    ps aan het eind van de middag werkte hij nog gewoon. Dit is de 3e keer in 2 manden. Gesteld op 18-10-2017 om 23:50

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Dag,

      hoe word het overschakelen van Tv naar recorder precies bedoeld?

      Doorgaans is het zo dat wanneer de recorder uitschakelt na korte of wat langere tijd, er sprake is van een defect. In bepaalde gevallen is de recorder dan nog wel in te schakelen, maar vaak zal dat uiteindelijk ook niet meer mogelijk zijn. Doorgaans is het te wijten aan lekke, of defect rakende elco's in de voeding, hetgeen meestal tegen een niet al te hoge prijs kan worden gerepareerd. Maar hou wel even in gedachten dat de DVD recorder eruit is geraakt en dat wanneer er straks meer defecten optreden, dit niet altijd meer is te repareren, of erg kostbaar kan worden.

      Mvg. Willem Geantwoord op 20-10-2017 om 00:00

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden
6

  • Bedankt voor uw antwoord , we denken ook dat het slijtage ie. De recorder wordt dagelijks een aantal uren gebruikt voor het opnemen en later weer voor het terug kijken. De recorder is van mijn vriendin , zelf heb ik de zelfde recorder ook aangeschaft maar nauwelijks gebruikt. Ga hem nu bij haar inzetten tot dat die ook op is.
    Met vriendelijke groet,
    Jetty Willems
    Rien van Ittersum Geantwoord op 20-10-2017 om 12:41

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Panasonic DMR-EH65 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Panasonic DMR-EH65 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,31 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Panasonic DMR-EH65

Panasonic DMR-EH65 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 84 pagina's

Panasonic DMR-EH65 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 84 pagina's

Panasonic DMR-EH65 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 84 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info